《欲经》释义的注释巴利
1. Kāmasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
在这里,以《欲经》为开头。在那部经里,也是以“若人正欲求欲”等偈颂作为开头。它按宣说、解释、反解释这三种方式成立。“若人正欲求欲”等是宣说。“欲,就摄类而言有两种欲:事欲与烦恼欲”是解释。“哪些是事欲?可喜之色”等是反解释。巴利
Tattha kāmasuttaṃ ādi. Tasmimpi ‘‘kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā’’ti gāthā ādi. Sā uddesaniddesapaṭiniddesavasena tidhā ṭhitā. ‘‘Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā’’ti evamādi uddeso. ‘‘Kāmāti uddānato dve kāmā – vatthukāmā ca kilesakāmā cā’’ti niddeso. ‘‘Katame vatthukāmā? Manāpikā rūpā’’ti evamādi paṭiniddeso.
1 在这里,“欲”指的是可喜的色等三地法,也就是所谓的事欲。“正欲求”就是正在渴望。“彼事成就”的意思是:如果那个正在欲求的众生,其称为欲的对象得以成就——也就是说,如果他得到了它——那么他便确实成为心满意足的人,即绝对欢喜心的人。“得已”就是得到之后。“众生”就是有情。“若得所愿”就是若得其所希求者。不过,这里只是简要说明词义之间的关联;详细解释应依上文经中所说的方式来了知。如此处所行,以后各处也都应如此理解。巴利
1. Tattha kāmanti manāpiyarūpāditebhūmakadhammasaṅkhātaṃ vatthukāmaṃ. Kāmayamānassāti icchamānassa. Tassa cetaṃ samijjhatīti tassa kāmayamānassa sattassa taṃ kāmasaṅkhātaṃ vatthu samijjhati ce, sace so taṃ labhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Addhā pītimano hotīti ekaṃsaṃ tuṭṭhacitto hoti. Laddhāti labhitvā. Maccoti satto. Yadicchatīti yaṃ icchati. Idaṃ pana saṅkhepato padatthasambandhamattameva, vitthāro pana upari pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayeneva veditabbo. Yathā ca imasmiṃ, evaṃ ito paraṃ sabbesupīti.
“欲”是应当指出的词。“摄颂”是应当解释的词。“摄颂”是按分类来说的,就像“鱼的摄颂应当买”等说法那样。或者,因为一层一层往上施设,所以叫摄颂,就像向上净化而称为清净一样。又或者,是以展开说明的方式。应当结合“欲”这个词的剩余读法来表述。“二”是数量的限定,不是一,也不是三。“事欲”就是可喜的色等对象。“烦恼欲”是以恼乱和逼迫为含义。在这些欲当中,事欲应当被遍知,烦恼欲应当被断除。其中,事欲因为烦恼欲而被希求,所以称为欲;烦恼欲因为是希求事欲的原因,所以通过它而被称为欲。在这当中,包含在色等蕴里的是事欲,包含在行蕴里的是烦恼欲。应当由六识来了知的是事欲,应当由意识来了知的是烦恼欲。事欲是烦恼的立足处、原因和所缘。巴利
Kāmāti uddisitabbapadaṃ. Uddānatoti niddisitabbapadaṃ. Uddānatoti vaggavasena ‘‘macchuddānaṃ kineyyā’’ti ādīsu viya. Atha vā uparūpari dānato uddānaṃ, uddhaṃ uddhaṃ sodhanato byavadānaṭṭhena vodānaṃ viya. Vitthārakaraṇabhāvena vā. Kāmā iti pāṭhasesaṃ katvā vattabbaṃ. Dveti gaṇanaparicchedo , na ekaṃ, na tayo. Vatthukāmā cāti manāpiyarūpādivatthukāmā ca. Upatāpanaṭṭhena vibādhanaṭṭhena ca kilesakāmā ca. Tesu vatthukāmo pariññeyyo, kilesakāmo pahātabbo. Tattha vatthukāmo kilesakāmena patthayitabboti kāmīyatīti kāmo. Kilesakāmo vatthukāmānaṃ paccāsīsanassa kāraṇabhāvena kāmīyate anenāti kāmo. Tattha rūpādikkhandhe saṅgahito vatthukāmo, saṅkhārakkhandhe saṅgahito kilesakāmo. Chahi viññāṇehi vijānitabbo vatthukāmo, manoviññāṇena jānitabbo kilesakāmo. Kilesānaṃ patiṭṭhaṭṭhena kāraṇaṭṭhena ārammaṇaṭṭhena ca vatthukāmo.
世间那些五花八门的东西并不是欲,人心里盘算着贪恋才是欲。
世间那些斑斓可爱的东西照样存在着,而智者就在这里调伏了欲求。巴利
‘‘Nete kāmā yāni citrāni loke, saṅkapparāgo purisassa kāmo; Tiṭṭhanti citrāni tatheva loke, athettha dhīrā vinayanti chanda’’nti. (a. ni. 6.63);
这里可以举例说明的,是难陀年轻人(《法句经注》1.68,莲华色长老尼的故事)和索雷亚长者之子(《法句经》43)等人的事迹。烦恼欲:因为它有灼烧的作用,又有逼迫的作用,而且它本身就是渴求,所以叫欲。经中也这样说:“婆罗门,一个被贪染征服、心被贪染彻底占据的人,会想伤害自己,会想伤害别人,也会想伤害自己和别人。”还有:“婆罗门,一个染著的人会杀生,会拿别人没给的东西,会侵犯别人的妻子,会说谎。”(增支部3.54)诸如此类,都是例证。巴利
Nandamāṇavaka- (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.68 uppalavaṇṇattherīvatthu) soreyyaseṭṭhiputtādīnaṃ (dha. pa. 43) vatthūni cettha nidassanaṃ. Kilesakāmo tāpanaṭṭhena bādhanaṭṭhena ca sayaṃ kāmetīti kāmo. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘ratto kho, brāhmaṇa, rāgena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto attabyābādhāyapi ceteti, parabyābādhāyapi ceteti, ubhayabyābādhāyapi cetetī’’ti ca ‘‘ratto kho, brāhmaṇa, pāṇampi hanati, adinnampi ādiyati, paradārampi gacchati, musāpi bhaṇatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.54) ca evamādi nidassanaṃ.
想要用反释的方式把它详细展开,于是说:“哪些是事欲?”等等。其中,“哪些”是想要解说而提出的问。问有五种,它们的分别将在上面的巴利经文中自然明了。在这些问当中,这一问是想要解说而提出的问。其中,“悦意”:能令心欢喜、使心增长,所以叫悦意;悦意本身就是悦意。“色”:由业、心、时节、食四种因所生的色所缘。所谓色,就是会变坏;当它发生变坏时,便显现出成为心所执取的状态,这就是它的意思。巴利
Tameva paṭiniddesavasena vitthāretvā vattukāmo – ‘‘katame vatthukāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha katameti kathetukamyatāpucchā. Pañcavidhā hi pucchā, tāsaṃ vibhāgo upari pāḷiyaṃyeva āvi bhavissati. Tāsu ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Tattha manāpikāti manaṃ appāyanti vaddhentīti manāpā, manāpā eva manāpikā. Rūpāti kammacittautuāhārasamuṭṭhānavasena catusamuṭṭhānikā rūpārammaṇā. Rūpayantīti rūpā, vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānā hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsentīti attho.
在这里,为什么称为“色”呢?因为会变坏。这是世尊所说的:巴利
Tattha kenaṭṭhena rūpanti? Ruppanaṭṭhena. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,什么是色?比丘们,因为它会变坏,所以称为色。被什么变坏呢?被寒冷变坏,被炎热变坏,被饥饿变坏,被口渴变坏,也被牛虻、蚊虫、风、烈日、爬虫的接触所变坏。比丘们,正因为它会变坏,所以称为色。巴利
‘‘Kiñca, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ vadetha? Ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā ‘rūpa’nti vuccati. Kena ruppati? Sītenapi ruppati, uṇhenapi ruppati, jighacchāyapi ruppati, pipāsāyapi ruppati, ḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassenapi ruppati. Ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā ‘rūpa’nti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.79).
在这里,“变坏”就是被激怒、被打击、被压迫、被粉碎,也就是被毁坏的意思。先说寒冷造成的变坏,这在中间地狱里非常明显。在摩醯沙迦国等降雪严寒的地方,这一点也同样明显。因为在那里,众生被寒冷弄得身体破裂断坏,甚至失去生命。巴利
Tattha ruppatīti kuppati ghaṭṭīyati pīḷīyati, bhijjatīti attho. Sītena tāva ruppanaṃ lokantarikaniraye pākaṭaṃ. Mahiṃsakaraṭṭhādīsupi himapātasītalesu padesesu etaṃ pākaṭameva. Tattha hi sattā sītena bhinnachinnasarīrā jīvitakkhayampi pāpuṇanti.
在无间大地狱里,被热逼恼而毁坏的情形非常明显。因为在那里,众生被按倒在烧红的铜地上,当狱卒用五种捆绑等方式整治他们时,他们感受到极大的痛苦。巴利
Uṇhena ruppanaṃ avīcimahāniraye pākaṭaṃ. Tattha hi tattāya lohapathaviyā nipajjāpetvā pañcavidhabandhanādikaraṇakāle sattā mahādukkhaṃ anubhavanti.
饥饿带来的折磨,在饿鬼界和饥荒时期都表现得非常明显。因为在饿鬼界里,众生哪怕经过两尊乃至三尊佛陀出世的漫长时间,也根本不曾有过用手拿起一点食物放进嘴里的事,他们的腹腔里面就像一棵烧得空心的树。在饥荒时期,众生连一点稀粥水都得不到而濒临死亡,其数量无法计算。巴利
Jighacchāya ruppanaṃ pettivisaye ceva dubbhikkhakāle ca pākaṭaṃ. Pettivisayasmiñhi sattā dve tīṇi buddhantarāni kiñcideva āmisaṃ hatthena gahetvā mukhe pakkhipantā nāma na honti, antoudaraṃ ādittasusirarukkho viya hoti. Dubbhikkhe kañjikamattampi alabhitvā maraṇasattānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi.
口渴造成的折磨,在迦罗干者迦饿鬼等地方很明显。因为在那里,众生在两三尊佛出世的间隔里,连一滴滋润心口或舌尖的水都得不到。他们想着“我们要喝水”走到河边,河水却变成了沙地。就算跳进大海,大海也成了石板。他们干渴难耐,被强烈的痛苦逼迫,放声哀号。虻虫等造成的折磨,在虻虫、苍蝇等众多的地方很明显。而这些内容,在阿毗达摩中已经通过“哪种色是可见的?是有对碍的?”等方式详细展开了论述。巴利
Pipāsāya ruppanaṃ kālakañjikādīsu pākaṭaṃ. Tattha hi sattā dve tīṇi buddhantarāni hadayatemanamattaṃ vā jivhātemanamattaṃ vā udakabindumpi laddhuṃ na sakkonti. ‘‘Pānīyaṃ pivissāmā’’ti nadiṃ gatānaṃ jalaṃ vālukātalaṃ sampajjati. Mahāsamuddaṃ pakkhantānampi samuddo piṭṭhipāsāṇoyeva hoti. Te sussantā balavadukkhapīḷitā viravanti. Ḍaṃsādīhi ruppanaṃ ḍaṃsamakkhikādibahulesu padesesu pākaṭaṃ. Taṃ pana – ‘‘katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ sanidassanaṃ? Sappaṭigha’’nti ādinā nayena abhidhamme (dha. sa. 656, 658) vitthāritameva.
声音是“发出声”的意思,也就是被发出、被说出来的意思。声音由时节和心这两种原因生起。香是“散发气味”的意思,也就是把自己的所依物显示出来。味是“众生品尝它们”的意思,也就是享受、品尝。触是“被接触”的意思。这些香、味等,都是由四种原因生起的。关于它们的详细分类,在阿毗达摩中(法集论622-624)已经详细说明了。巴利
Sappantīti saddā, udāharīyantīti attho. Utucittavasena dvisamuṭṭhānikā saddā. Gandhayantīti gandhā, attano vatthūni sūcayantīti attho. Rasanti te sattāti rasā, assādentīti attho. Phusīyantīti phoṭṭhabbā. Ete gandhādayo catusamuṭṭhānikāva . Tesaṃ vibhāgo abhidhamme (dha. sa. 622-624) vitthāritoyeva.
为了详细说明这个意思,就说了“铺盖、披覆”等话。其中,铺开来躺在上面的,叫铺盖;把身体裹起来穿上的,叫披覆。家生的等四种奴隶,加上女奴、男奴和奴婢,就是奴婢。田,是指早期作物生长的地方;地,是指后期作物生长的地方。或者两种作物都生长的地方,就是田;为了种植而整理出来的地块,就是地。这里用田和地来代表,也把池塘、水库等都包括进去了。货币,是指迦沙婆那钱;黄金,是指天然金块。举出这两样,也就把铜钱、紫胶币、木币等全都包括进来了。村庄、市集、王都:只有几间小屋之类的地方是村庄;有商店聚集的地方是市集;一位国王发号施令的地方是王都。国土,是指一个国家里的一部分地区。地方,是指迦尸国、憍萨罗国这样的国家。军队,是指象兵、马兵、车兵、步兵四种。仓库,是指财库、谷仓、布帛库三种。任何,是无所遗漏、全部包括的意思。可染的,是指适合用来染色的意思。巴利
Tamevatthaṃ vitthāravasena dassento ‘‘attharaṇā pāvuraṇā’’tiādimāha. Tattha attharitvā nipajjiyantīti attharaṇā. Sarīraṃ veṭhetvā pārupīyantīti pāvuraṇā. Antojātādayo cattāro dāsī ca dāso ca dāsidāsā. Khettaṃ nāma yasmiṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Vatthu nāma yasmiṃ aparaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Yattha vā ubhayampi ruhati, taṃ khettaṃ. Tadatthāya katabhūmibhāgo vatthu. Khettavatthusīsena cettha vāpītaḷākādīnipi saṅgahitāni. Hiraññanti kahāpaṇo. Suvaṇṇanti jātarūpaṃ. Tesaṃ gahaṇena lohamāsako jatumāsako dārumāsakoti sabbepi saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Gāmanigamarājadhāniyoti ekakuṭikādi gāmo. Āpaṇayutto nigamo. Ekassa rañño āṇāpavattiṭṭhānaṃ rājadhānī. Raṭṭhanti janapadekadesaṃ. Janapadoti kāsikosalādijanapado. Kosoti catubbidho koso – hatthī asso ratho patti. Koṭṭhāgāranti tividhaṃ koṭṭhāgāraṃ – dhanakoṭṭhāgāraṃ dhaññakoṭṭhāgāraṃ vatthakoṭṭhāgāraṃ. Yaṃ kiñcīti anavasesapariyādānavacanaṃ. Rajanīyanti rañjetuṃ yuttaṭṭhena.
接下来,为了按三法一组的方式来说明,世尊又讲了六组三法:过去三法、内三法、劣三法、处所三法、相应三法、欲界三法。其中,在“过去三法”里:已经达到自身的状态,或者已经经过了生起等刹那而过去的,就是“过去”。这两种情况都还没有到来的,就是“未来”。依于各种原因而生起的,就是“现在”。这是按“存在”来界定的。因为从结生那一刻开始,不论是在过去世中投生,还是在紧接着的前一世投生,或者是在百千万劫之前投生,这一切都叫做“过去”。从死亡那一刻开始,将在未来世中投生的欲,不论是在紧接着的下一世投生,还是在百千万劫之后才投生,这一切都叫做“未来”。而在死亡与结生之间生起的欲,则叫做“现在”。巴利
Ito paraṃ tikavasena dassetuṃ atītattikaajjhattattikahīnattikaokāsattikasaṃyogattikakāmāvacarattikavasena chattike āha. Tattha atītattike tāva attano sabhāvaṃ uppādādikkhaṇaṃ vā patvā atikkantāti atītā. Tadubhayampi na āgatāti anāgatā. Taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca uppannāti paccuppannā. Idaṃ bhavena paricchannaṃ. Paṭisandhito hi paṭṭhāya atītabhavesu nibbattā anantarabhave vā nibbattā hontu kappakoṭisatasahassamatthake vā, sabbe atītāyeva nāma. Cutito paṭṭhāya anāgatabhavesu nibbattanakā kāmā anantarabhave vā nibbattantu kappakoṭisatasahassamatthake vā, sabbe anāgatāyeva nāma. Cutipaṭisandhiantare pavattā kāmā paccuppannā nāma.
在内外三法这一组里,以这样的意图——“当我们这样活着运作时,就会执取‘这是我’”——把“我”当作所缘,在自身的相续中生起的、属于每个人各自的欲,就叫作内欲。与此相对,存在于外部的,不论是与根相连还是不与根相连,都叫作外欲。第三项则是就这两者合起来说的。巴利
Ajjhattattike ‘‘evaṃ pavattamānā mayaṃ attāti gahaṇaṃ gamissāmā’’ti iminā viya adhippāyena attānaṃ adhikāraṃ katvā pavattā attano santāne pavattā pāṭipuggalikā kāmā ajjhattā kāmā nāma. Tato bahibhūtā pana indriyabaddhā vā anindriyabaddhā vā bahiddhā nāma. Tatiyapadaṃ tadubhayavasena vuttaṃ.
在“劣三法”中,“劣”就是低劣。“中”是指在低劣和殊胜之间,所以叫中。“其余的”则从最上的意义说,是殊胜。而且,应当知道,劣、中、殊胜是随着比较对象的不同而成立的。比如,地狱众生的欲已经达到极点,所以叫“劣”。以他们为比较对象,畜生中龙和金翅鸟的欲就叫“殊胜”,其余畜生的欲就叫“中”。那些畜生的欲又是“劣”;以他们为比较对象,有大威力的饿鬼的欲就叫“殊胜”,其余饿鬼的欲就叫“中”。那些饿鬼的欲又是“劣”;以他们为比较对象,内地居民的欲就叫“殊胜”,边地居民的欲就叫“中”。那些边地居民的欲又是“劣”;以他们为比较对象,村长的欲就叫“殊胜”,村长的侍从的欲就叫“中”。那些侍从的欲又是“劣”;以他们为比较对象,地方领主的欲就叫“殊胜”,地方领主的侍从的欲就叫“中”。那些侍从的欲又是“劣”;以他们为比较对象,地区国王的欲就叫“殊胜”,地区国王的大臣的欲就叫“中”。那些大臣的欲又是“劣”;以他们为比较对象,转轮王的欲就叫“殊胜”,转轮王的大臣的欲就叫“中”。转轮王的欲又是“劣”;以他们为比较对象,地居天人的欲就叫“殊胜”,地居天人的侍从天人的欲就叫“中”。那些侍从天人的欲又是“劣”;以他们为比较对象,四大王天众天的欲就叫“殊胜”……按这样的方式,一直到色究竟天众天的欲,达到顶点的就叫“殊胜”。这样,随着比较对象的不同,劣、中、殊胜的成立应当知道。巴利
Hīnattike hīnāti lāmakā. Majjhimāti hīnapaṇītānaṃ majjhe bhavāti majjhimā. Avasesā uttamaṭṭhena paṇītā. Api ca upādāyupādāya hīnamajjhimapaṇītatā veditabbā. Nerayikānañhi kāmā koṭippattā hīnā nāma. Te upādāya tiracchānesu nāgasupaṇṇānaṃ kāmā paṇītā nāma. Sesatiracchānagatānaṃ kāmā majjhimā nāma. Tesampi kāmā hīnā. Te upādāya mahesakkhapetānaṃ kāmā paṇītā nāma. Avasesānaṃ kāmā majjhimā nāma. Tesampi hīnā. Te upādāya jānapadānaṃ kāmā paṇītā nāma. Paccantavāsīnaṃ kāmā majjhimā nāma. Tesampi hīnā. Te upādāya gāmabhojakānaṃ kāmā paṇītā nāma. Tesaṃ paricārikānaṃ kāmā majjhimā nāma. Tesampi hīnā. Te upādāya janapadasāmikānaṃ kāmā paṇītā nāma. Tesaṃ paricārikānaṃ kāmā majjhimā nāma. Tesampi hīnā. Te upādāya padesarājūnaṃ kāmā paṇītā nāma. Tesaṃ amaccānaṃ kāmā majjhimā nāma. Tesampi hīnā. Te upādāya cakkavattirañño kāmā paṇītā nāma. Tassa amaccānaṃ kāmā majjhimā nāma. Tassapi hīnā. Te upādāya bhummadevānaṃ kāmā paṇītā nāma. Tesaṃ paricārikānaṃ devānaṃ kāmā majjhimā nāma. Tesampi hīnā. Te upādāya cātumahārājikānaṃ devānaṃ kāmā paṇītātiādinā nayena yāva akaniṭṭhadevānaṃ kāmā matthakappattā paṇītā nāma. Evaṃ upādāyupādāya hīnamajjhimapaṇītatā veditabbā.
在处所三法里,恶趣的欲是指:在被称为无增长、已离乐处的四种恶趣中产生的欲,就是恶趣的欲。在人间产生的欲,是人类的欲。在天界产生的欲,是天界的欲。巴利
Okāsattike āpāyikā kāmāti avaḍḍhisaṅkhātesu apagataayesu catūsu apāyesu nibbattakāmā āpāyikā. Manussesu nibbattakāmā mānusikā. Devesu nibbattakāmā dibbā.
在结合三法这一节里:除了地狱众生,其余恶趣众生和人类,从四大王天开始一直到兜率天的天人,他们受用现前存在的欲,这些欲就叫作“现前欲”。化乐天的天人想要比原本准备好的所缘更加尽情享受时,就随心所欲地一再化现出所缘来享乐,所以他们的欲叫作“化现欲”。他化自在天的天人先了解自己的心意,然后享用其他天人化现出来的所缘,所以他们的欲叫作“他化现欲”。被执取,是指被当成“这是我的”而执持的欲。未被执取,是指同样没有被这样执持的欲,也就是北俱卢洲人的欲。我所执,是指以渴爱的力量执著为“这是我的”。非我所执,则与上述情况相反。巴利
Saṃyogattike paccupaṭṭhitānaṃ kāmānaṃ paribhuñjanato ṭhapetvā nerayike sesaapāyasattānaṃ manussānaṃ cātumahārājike deve upādāya yāva tusitakāyikānañca devānaṃ kāmā paccupaṭṭhitā kāmā nāma. Pakatipaṭiyattārammaṇato atirekena ramitukāmatākāle yathārucitaṃ ārammaṇaṃ nimminitvā nimminitvā ramantīti nimmānaratīnaṃ devānaṃ kāmā nimmitā kāmā nāma. Attano ajjhāsayaṃ ñatvā parehi nimmite ārammaṇe sevantīti paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ kāmā paranimmitā kāmā nāma. Pariggahitāti ‘‘mayhaṃ eta’’nti gahitā kāmā. Apariggahitāti tathā apariggahitā uttarakurukānaṃ kāmā. Mamāyitāti taṇhāvasena ‘‘mama eta’’nti gahitā. Amamāyitāti vuttapaṭipakkhā.
一切欲界法:这些法都包含在按照“从下面以无间地狱为界限……”等方式所说的欲界法当中。这里解释一下词义:概括地说,欲有两种——事欲和烦恼欲。其中,烦恼欲在意义上就是欲贪;事欲则是三地的流转。在这里,烦恼欲之所以叫“欲”,是因为它能欲求;另一种则是因为它被欲求。而在两种欲共同活动的那个领域,按四恶趣、人间和六欲天来分共有十一种领域,欲在这里活动,所以叫“欲界”。针对那个领域所包含的法,就说“一切欲界法”。所谓“法”,是指能保持自性的法。色界法:按照“从下面以梵天世界为界限,上面以色究竟天为限……”等方式所说的色界法,凡是这些法都是色界法。无色界法:按照“从下面以空无边处所生天为界限,上面以非想非非想处所生天为限……”等方式所说的无色界法,凡是这些法都是无色界法。其中,在色界中活动的,叫色界法;在无色界中活动的,叫无色界法。为渴爱所依:从住立的意义和原因的意义上说,是渴爱的依处。为渴爱所缘:以渴爱活动的方式,成为渴爱的所缘。可意乐义:就是应当希求的意思。可染义:就是适合染着的意思。可迷醉义:就是能生起家族骄慢等迷醉的意思。巴利
Sabbepi kāmāvacarā dhammāti ‘‘heṭṭhato avīcinirayaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1287) nayena vuttesu kāmāvacaradhammesu pariyāpannā. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – uddānato dve kāmā, vatthukāmo ca kilesakāmo cāti. Tattha kilesakāmo atthato chandarāgo. Vatthukāmo tebhūmakaṃ vaṭṭaṃ. Kilesakāmo cettha kāmetīti kāmo. Itaro kāmīyatīti. Yasmiṃ pana padese duvidhopeso kāmo pavattivasena avacarati, so catunnaṃ apāyānaṃ manussānaṃ channañca devalokānaṃ vasena ekādasavidho padeso kāmo ettha avacaratīti kāmāvacaro. Tattha pariyāpannadhamme sandhāya ‘‘sabbepi kāmāvacarā dhammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Attano sabhāvaṃ dhārentīti dhammā. Rūpāvacarā dhammāti ‘‘heṭṭhato brahmalokaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito akaniṭṭhe deve antokaritvā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1289) nayena vuttānaṃ rūpāvacaradhammānaṃ vasena sabbepi dhammā rūpāvacarā. Arūpāvacarā dhammāti ‘‘heṭṭhato ākāsānañcāyatanupage deve pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito nevasaññānāsaññāyatanupage deve antokaritvā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1291) nayena vuttā sabbepi arūpāvacarā dhammā . Tattha rūpe avacarantīti rūpāvacarā. Arūpe avacarantīti arūpāvacarā. Taṇhāvatthukāti patiṭṭhaṭṭhena kāraṇaṭṭhena ca taṇhāya vatthubhūtā. Taṇhārammaṇāti taṇhāpavattivasena taṇhāya ārammaṇabhūtā. Kāmanīyaṭṭhenāti paccāsīsitabbaṭṭhena. Rajanīyaṭṭhenāti rañjetuṃ yuttaṭṭhena. Madanīyaṭṭhenāti kulamadādimadaṃ uppādanīyaṭṭhena.
在这里,先以“哪些是事欲?即可爱的诸色……”这样开始,最后归结到“任何可染着的事物”,这是就具有认知与不具认知两类来说的。其余部分,则应理解为一种四法组合乃至六法组合的方式。巴利
Tattha ‘‘katame vatthukāmā? Manāpikā rūpā’’tiādiṃ katvā ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rajanīyaṃ vatthū’’ti pariyosānaṃ saviññāṇakaaviññāṇakavasena vuttaṃ. Avasesaṃ ekacatukkādikachattikanti veditabbaṃ.
像这样先说明了事欲之后,为了说明烦恼欲,就说了“什么是烦恼欲”等话。其中,“欲”是指微弱的贪。“贪”是指比它更强的贪。上面说的另外三种贪,又比这些更强。“于诸欲中”是指在五种欲功德中。“欲贪”是指名为欲的欲求,不是想要去做的欲求,也不是对法的欲求。依于欲、依于染著,欲本身就是贪,所以叫欲贪;依于欲、依于欢喜,欲本身就是喜,所以叫欲喜。应当这样在一切处了知“欲”的含义。以渴爱为义,就是欲爱;以粘著为义,就是欲恋;以遍烧为义,就是欲热恼;以迷醉为义,就是欲迷醉;以吞下而令其究竟为义,就是欲固着;因为能以瀑流令人在流转中沉没,所以叫欲瀑流;因为能系缚在流转中,所以叫欲轭;强力执取渴爱和邪见,就是取;障盖、遍缠于心,就是盖。巴利
Evaṃ vatthukāmaṃ dassetvā kilesakāmaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘katame kilesakāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha chandoti dubbalarāgo. Rāgoti tato balavataro . Upari tayopi rāgā imehi balavatarā. Kāmesūti pañcasu kāmaguṇesu. Kāmacchandoti kāmasaṅkhāto chando, na kattukamyatāchando, na dhammacchando. Kāmanavasena rajjanavasena ca kāmoyeva rāgo kāmarāgo. Kāmanavasena nandanavasena ca kāmoyeva nandī kāmanandī. Evaṃ sabbattha kāmatthaṃ viditvā taṇhāyanaṭṭhena kāmataṇhā. Sinehanaṭṭhena kāmasneho. Pariḍayhanaṭṭhena kāmapariḷāho. Mucchanaṭṭhena kāmamucchā. Gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpanaṭṭhena kāmajjhosānaṃ. Vaṭṭasmiṃ oghehi osīdāpetīti kāmogho. Vaṭṭasmiṃ yojetīti kāmayogo. Daḷhavasena taṇhādiṭṭhiggahaṇaṃ upādānaṃ. Cittaṃ nīvarati pariyonandhatīti nīvaraṇaṃ.
我看见。欲,是称呼语。你,就是你。根本,就是立足处。思惟,就是谋划。我将不再思惟它,就是我不再作那种谋划。你将不会存在,就是你将不复存在。巴利
Addasanti addakkhiṃ. Kāmāti ālapanaṃ. Teti tava. Mūlanti patiṭṭhaṃ. Saṅkappāti parikappena. Na taṃ saṅkappayissāmīti taṃ parikappanaṃ na karissāmi. Na hohisīti na bhavissasi.
想要的人,就是有所期待的人。爱乐的人,就是正在享受的人。希愿的人,就是生起愿求的人。向往的人,就是生起想要得到之心的人。热切祈盼的人,就是因渴爱而心生满足的人。或者也可以说,是正在称说的人。巴利
Icchamānassāti paccāsīsantassa. Sādiyamānassāti assādiyamānassa. Patthayamānassāti patthanaṃ uppādentassa. Pihayamānassāti pāpuṇituṃ icchaṃ uppādentassa. Abhijappamānassāti taṇhāvasena tittiṃ uppādentassa. Atha vā abhivadantassa.
“刹帝利或……”这些,是按四种种姓来说的。“在家者或出家者”,是按身份特征来说的。“天神或人”,是按投生去处来说的。“成就”,就是实现。“善成就”,就是正确地实现。ijjhati(成就)是就获得殊胜色身而言;labhati(得)是就获得悦目色身而言;paṭilabhati(获得)是就获得令人净信的色身而言;adhigacchati(达到)是就获得端严色身而言;vindati(体验到)是就获得肤色明净而言。或者也可以说:因为福德广大而成就;因为种姓高贵而得;因为自在广大而获得;因为安乐广大而达到;因为圆满广大而体验到。巴利
Khattiyassa vātiādi catujjātivasena vuttaṃ. Gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vāti liṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Devassa vā manussassa vāti upapattivasena vuttaṃ. Ijjhatīti nipphajjati. Samijjhatīti sammā nipphajjati. Ijjhati visesarūpapaṭilābhavasena. Labhati dassanīyarūpapaṭilābhavasena. Paṭilabhati pasādanīyarūpapaṭilābhavasena. Adhigacchati saṇṭhānarūpapaṭilābhavasena. Vindati chavippasādarūpapaṭilābhavasena. Atha vā puññamahattena ijjhati. Jātimahattena labhati. Issariyamahattena paṭilabhati. Sukhamahattena adhigacchati. Sampattimahattena vindatīti.
“一分说”是指只认定一个方面的说法。就像“偏袒一肩”里的“一肩”,以及“应作一分记说的问题”等用法那样,是排斥执取多个方面的说法。“无疑说”是指没有疑惑的说法,意思是遮破怀疑的说法。“无犹豫说”是指遮破“这是怎么回事?这是怎么回事?”这种犹豫心态的说法。“非分歧说”:“分歧”就是分成两边的状态,因为没有这种状态,所以叫非分歧说。它远离两边,就像“诸佛说法无分歧”等用法那样,是遮破犹豫。“无诳说”:以没有两种心的状态而称为无诳。“所谓‘诳、诳’”,是遮破诳说的说法。“决定说”:两者不可并存于同一意义,所以叫决定说,是遮破歧路的说法。另外,在别处则有“决定说没有以未来为所缘”这样的说法。“无颠倒说”:远离虚妄、具有实质的说法,是不违背原因的说法,就像“无颠倒,一处”等用法那样,如同无颠倒宝珠,是善安立的说法。“令安住说”:这句话是深入之后安立、建立、放置的说法。巴利
Ekaṃsavacananti ekakoṭṭhāsavacanaṃ. ‘‘Ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā (pārā. 349, 367), ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyo pañho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.312; a. ni. 4.42) viya anekaṃsagahaṇapaṭikkhepo. Nissaṃsayavacananti saṃsayavirahitavacanaṃ, sandehapaṭikkhepavacananti attho. Nikkaṅkhāvacananti ‘‘kathamidaṃ kathamida’’nti kaṅkhāpaṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Advejjhavacananti dvidhābhāvaṃ dvejjhaṃ, taṃabhāvena advejjhavacanaṃ. Dvidhābhāvavirahitaṃ ‘‘advejjhavacanā buddhā’’tiādīsu viya vimatipaṭikkhepo. Adveḷhakavacananti dvihadayābhāvena adveḷhakaṃ. ‘‘Itihāsa, itihāsā’’ti dveḷhakapaṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Niyogavacananti ekasmiṃ atthe dve na yujjantīti niyogavacanaṃ dvidhāpathapaṭikkhepo. Aññattha pana ‘‘niyogā anāgatārammaṇā natthī’’ti āgataṃ. Apaṇṇakavacananti palāsarahitaṃ sāravacanaṃ aviraddhakāraṇaṃ ‘‘apaṇṇakaṃ ṭhānameke’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.1.1) viya, apaṇṇakamaṇi viya sappatiṭṭhavacanaṃ. Avatthāpanavacanametanti etaṃ vacanaṃ otaritvā patiṭṭhitaṃ santiṭṭhāpanaṃ ṭhapanaṃ.
在这部《大释义》里,那些被赋予词形变化的词,在发生词形变化时,是通过三种方式发生变化的;而当它们彼此不同时,则是通过四种方式成为不同的。《后灯》在这里还提到两种情况。怎么理解呢?这些词是通过音、前缀或意义这三种方式而发生词形变化的。其中,依音而发生词形变化的情形,应当理解为像“忿、正忿、已忿;嗔、正嗔、已嗔”这样。在这里,同一个“忿”就是依音而这样获得词形变化的。依前缀而发生词形变化的情形,应当理解为像“成就、善成就、得、获得、去、通达”这样。依意义而发生词形变化的情形,应当理解为像“智慧、善巧、精审、明了、思惟、审察”这样。巴利
Yāni imasmiṃ mahāniddese vibhattiṃ āropitāni padāni, tāni vibhattiṃ gacchantāni tīhi kāraṇehi vibhattiṃ gacchanti, nānā hontāni catūhi kāraṇehi nānā bhavanti. Aparadīpanā panettha dve ṭhānāni gacchanti. Kathaṃ? Tāni hi byañjanavasena upasaggavasena atthavasena vāti imehi tīhi kāraṇehi vibhattiṃ gacchanti. Tattha ‘‘kodho kujjhanā kujjhitattaṃ, doso dussanā dussitatta’’nti (dha. sa. 1066) evaṃ byañjanavasena vibhattigamanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha hi ekova kodho byañjanavasena evaṃ vibhattiṃ labhati. ‘‘Ijjhati samijjhati labhati paṭilabhati gacchati adhigacchatī’’ti evaṃ pana upasaggavasena vibhattigamanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Paṇḍiccaṃ kosallaṃ nepuññaṃ vebhabyā cintā upaparikkhā’’ti (dha. sa. 16) evaṃ atthavasena vibhattigamanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这些当中,先看“喜”这个词的解释,可以见到三种词形变化。比如“喜”和“欢喜”,这是按音节来变化词形的;“欣悦、悦乐、大笑”,这是按前缀来变化词形的;“欢喜、满足、喜悦、满意”,这是按意义来变化词形的。按照这个方法,应当理解一切词的解释中词形变化的情况。巴利
Tesu pītipadaniddese tāva imā tisso vibhattiyo labbhanti. Pīti pāmojjanti hi byañjanavasena vibhattigamanaṃ hoti. Āmodanā pamodanā pahāsoti upasaggavasena. Vitti tuṭṭhi odagyaṃ attamanatāti atthavasena. Iminā nayena sabbapadaniddesesu vibhattigamanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
它们即使各不相同,也因名称不同、特相不同、作用不同、遮遣不同这四种原因而各不相同。其中,在“那时什么是嗔恨?就是那时的嗔、嗔怒……”这一段里,无论是叫“嗔恨”还是叫“嗔”,这两个其实都只是忿,只是在名称上有了差别。应当这样按名称的不同来理解它们的差别。巴利
Nānā hontānipi nāmanānattena lakkhaṇanānattena kiccanānattena paṭikkhepanānattenāti imehi catūhi kāraṇehi nānā honti. Tattha ‘‘katamo tasmiṃ samaye byāpādo hoti? Yo tasmiṃ samaye doso dussanā’’ti ettha byāpādoti vā dosoti vā dvepi ete kodho eva, nāmena pana nānattaṃ gatāti evaṃ nāmanānattena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
从聚集的意义来说,五蕴也可以说是同一蕴。不过在这里,色以变坏为特征,受以领纳为特征,想以识别为特征,思以意志为特征,识以了别为特征——正是因为这些特征的差异,才有五蕴。应当这样通过特征的差异来理解它们的多样性。巴利
Rāsaṭṭhena ca pañcapi khandhā ekova khandho hoti. Ettha pana rūpaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanā vedayitalakkhaṇā, saññā sañjānanalakkhaṇā, cetanā cetayitalakkhaṇā, viññāṇaṃ vijānanalakkhaṇanti iminā lakkhaṇanānattena pañcakkhandhā honti. Evaṃ lakkhaṇanānattena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
四正勤——这里,比丘为了不让尚未生起的邪恶不善法生起……(中略)……他策励心、精勤努力。这是同一个精进,因为作用不同而在四种场合出现。应当这样按作用的不同来了知它们的差别。巴利
‘‘Cattāro sammappadhānā – idha bhikkhu anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāya…pe… cittaṃ paggaṇhāti padahatī’’ti (vibha. 390; dī. ni. 2.402) ekameva vīriyaṃ kiccanānattena catūsu ṭhānesu āgataṃ. Evaṃ kiccanānattena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
另外,在“有四种非法:看重愤怒而不看重正法,看重覆藏而不看重正法,看重利养而不看重正法,看重恭敬而不看重正法”(《增支部》4.44)这类经文里,应当按所遮止的内容不同,来理解它们的差别。巴利
‘‘Cattāro asaddhammā kodhagarutā, na saddhammagarutā, makkhagarutā, na saddhammagarutā, lābhagarutā, na saddhammagarutā, sakkāragarutā, na saddhammagarutā’’ti evamādīsu (a. ni. 4.44) pana paṭikkhepanānattena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
不过,这四种差别并不是只有喜才具有,一切法都可以按各自获得的方式而具有。因为对于喜,就称为喜;对于心,就称为心。而且,喜以遍满为特征,受以感受为特征,想以认知为特征,思以意志思量为特征,识以了别为特征。巴利
Imāni pana cattāri nānattāni na pītiyāyeva labbhanti, sabbesupi yathālābhavasena labbhanti. Pītiyā hi pītīti nāmaṃ, cittassa cittanti nāmaṃ. Pīti ca pharaṇalakkhaṇā, vedanā vedayitalakkhaṇā, saññā sañjānanalakkhaṇā, cetanā cetayitalakkhaṇā, viññāṇaṃ vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
同样地,喜的作用是遍满,受的作用是体验,想的作用是识别,思的作用是造作意志,识的作用是了知——应当这样按作用的不同来理解它们的差别。在“喜”这个词的解释中,并不存在以遮遣方式来说的差别。巴利
Tathā pīti pharaṇakiccā, vedanā anubhavanakiccā, saññā sañjānanakiccā, cetanā cetayitakiccā, viññāṇaṃ vijānanakiccanti evaṃ kiccanānattena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Paṭikkhepanānattaṃ pītipade natthi.
不过在解说“无贪”等词时,可以按照“无贪,即不贪、不贪的状态”等(《法集论》35)这种方式来理解,所以应当这样通过遮遣的方式来了解多样性。同样,在解说一切词时,应当根据它们能被理解的方式,来了解这四种多样性。巴利
Alobhādiniddese pana ‘‘alobho alubbhanā alubbhitatta’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 35) nayena labbhatīti evaṃ paṭikkhepanānattena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ sabbapadaniddesesu labbhamānavasena catubbidhampi nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
另外,复注则有两种作用:一是解释词义,二是加强语气。如果只说一次“喜”,这个词还不算繁茂、庄严、光辉,就像用杖尖只按一下那样;只有反复从文句、从前缀、从义理上说“喜、欢悦、庆悦、喜悦、欢笑、大笑、得意”(《法集论》9),这才算繁茂、庄严、光辉。就像让人给一个少年沐浴,穿上悦意的衣服,戴上花饰,涂上眼膏,然后只在他额头上点一个孤零零的雄黄点,这还不算额头的妙相庄严;如果用种种颜色围绕,点上许多点,这才算额头的妙相庄严。应当这样理解这里的成就。这就叫解释词义。巴利
Aparadīpanā pana padatthuti vā hoti daḷhīkammaṃ vāti evaṃ dve ṭhānāni gacchati. Yaṭṭhikoṭiyā uppīḷentena viya hi sakimeva ‘‘pītī’’ti vutte etaṃ padaṃ phullitamaṇḍitavibhūsitaṃ nāma na hoti, punappunaṃ byañjanavasena upasaggavasena atthavasena ‘‘pīti pāmojjaṃ āmodanā pamodanā hāso pahāso vittī’’ti (dha. sa. 9) vutte phullitamaṇḍitavibhūsitaṃ nāma hoti. Yathā hi daharakumāraṃ nahāpetvā manoramaṃ vatthaṃ paridahāpetvā pupphāni piḷandhāpetvā akkhīni añjetvā athassa nalāṭe ekameva manosilābinduṃ kareyya, na tassa ettāvatā cittatilako nāma hoti, nānāvaṇṇehi pana parivāretvā bindūsu katesu cittatilako nāma hoti. Evaṃ sampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ padatthuti nāma.
不过,从文句、从前缀、从义理三方面反复宣说,这才叫强调。比如只说“贤友”“尊者”“亚卡”“蛇”,不算强调;但说“贤友贤友、尊者尊者、亚卡亚卡、蛇蛇”时,就算强调了。同样,像用杖端只按一下就完事,只说一次“喜”,不算强调;只有反复从文句、从前缀、从义理说“喜、欢悦、庆悦、喜悦、欢笑、大笑、得意”时,才算强调。这样,复注就有两种作用。依此,在一切可以逐词解说的场合,每一处都应了达其义。巴利
Byañjanavasena pana upasaggavasena atthavasena ca punappunaṃ bhaṇanameva daḷhīkammaṃ nāma. Yathā hi ‘‘āvuso’’ti vā ‘‘bhante’’ti vā ‘‘yakkho’’ti vā ‘‘sappo’’ti vā vutte daḷhīkammaṃ nāma na hoti, ‘‘āvuso āvuso, bhante bhante, yakkho yakkho, sappo sappo’’ti vutte pana daḷhīkammaṃ nāma hoti, evameva sakiṃdeva yaṭṭhikoṭiyā uppīḷentena viya ‘‘pītī’’ti vuttamatte daḷhīkammaṃ nāma na hoti, punappunaṃ byañjanavasena upasaggavasena atthavasena ‘‘pīti pāmojjaṃ āmodanā pamodanā hāso pahāso vittī’’ti vutteyeva daḷhīkammaṃ nāma hotīti evaṃ aparadīpanā dve ṭhānāni gacchati. Etissāpi vasena labbhamānakapadaniddesesu sabbattha attho veditabbo.
在这里,能让人欢喜,所以叫“喜”。它的特相是令人感到合意、喜爱,作用是让身心满足,或者说是遍满身心,表现为身心轻快振奋。所谓“与五种欲相连结的”,就是指与色等五种欲的部分相联系的喜,它因为能让人欢喜,所以叫“喜”,这是从自性上来说的词。“已欢喜者的状态”叫“欢悦”。“庆悦”是庆悦的行相。“喜悦”是喜悦的行相。或者,就像把各种药、各种油,或者温水、冷水合在一起,称为“和合”那样,这里也是因为把喜等法合在一起,所以叫“和悦”。再通过前缀加以修饰,就说为“庆悦、喜悦”。巴利
Tattha pīnayatīti pīti. Sā sampiyāyanalakkhaṇā, kāyacittapīṇanarasā pharaṇarasā vā, odagyapaccupaṭṭhānā. Yā pañcakāmaguṇapaṭisaññuttāti yā rūpādipañcakāmakoṭṭhāsapaṭisaṃyuttā pīti, sā pīnayatīti pīti, idaṃ sabhāvapadaṃ. Pamuditassa bhāvo pāmojjaṃ. Āmodanākāro āmodanā. Pamodanākāro pamodanā. Yathā vā bhesajjānaṃ vā telānaṃ vā uṇhodakasītodakānaṃ vā ekato karaṇaṃ ‘‘modanā’’ti vuccati, evamayampi pītidhammānaṃ ekato karaṇena modanā. Upasaggavasena pana maṇḍetvā ‘‘āmodanā pamodanā’’ti vuttā.
能让人笑,就叫笑;能让人大笑,就叫大笑,这是对欢喜雀跃状态的称呼。vitta 就是财富,本来是财富的名称。但这里因为它是悦乐的缘,又和财富相似,所以叫 vitti。就像富人依靠财富而生起悦乐,有喜的人也是依靠喜而生起悦乐,因此称为 vitti。tuṭṭhi 是以自性安住的喜的名称。而有喜的人,因为身心高举、上涌,就称为 udagga,udagga 的状态就是 odagya。巴利
Hāsetīti hāso. Pahāsetīti pahāso, haṭṭhapahaṭṭhākārānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vittīti vittaṃ, dhanassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ayaṃ pana somanassapaccayattā vittisarikkhatāya vitti. Yathā hi dhanino dhanaṃ paṭicca somanassaṃ uppajjati, evaṃ pītimatopi pītiṃ paṭicca somanassaṃ uppajjati. Tasmā ‘‘vittī’’ti vuttā. Tuṭṭhīti sabhāvasaṇṭhitāya pītiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Pītimā pana puggalo kāyacittānaṃ uggatattā abbhuggatattā ‘‘udaggo’’ti vuccati, udaggassa bhāvo odagyaṃ.
自己的欢喜状态就是“自喜”。因为对不欢喜的人来说,他的意以苦为依托处,所以不能叫“自己的意”;对欢喜的人来说,他的意以乐为依托处,所以才能叫“自己的意”。因此,自己的欢喜状态就是自喜,也就是自己的意、自己的意所处的状态,这就是它的含义。不过,这种自喜并不是任何别人的意的状态,而只是心本身的这种状态,是属于心所的法,所以说“自喜是心的”。巴利
Attano manatā attamanatā. Anabhiraddhassa hi mano dukkhapadaṭṭhānattā na attano mano nāma hoti, abhiraddhassa sukhapadaṭṭhānattā attano mano nāma hoti, iti attano manatā attamanatā, sakamanatā, sakamanassa bhāvoti attho. Sā pana yasmā na aññassa kassaci attano manatā, cittasseva panesā bhāvo cetasiko dhammo, tasmā ‘‘attamanatā cittassā’’ti vuttā.
心因为种种不同的状态而称为心。能衡量所缘并了知,所以称为意。所谓“意性的”,就是意本身。比如“游行虚空的套索,那游行的意性套索”这句话里,这里相应的法就被称为“意性的”。巴利
Cittavicittatāya cittaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ minamānaṃ jānātīti mano. Mānasanti mano eva, ‘‘antalikkhacaro pāso, yvāyaṃ carati mānaso’’ti (mahāva. 33; saṃ. ni. 1.151) hi ettha pana sampayuttakadhammo ‘‘mānaso’’ti vutto.
世尊啊,您的弟子怎么会乐于您的教法呢?
未证阿罗汉果的有学圣者若命终,其死讯为众人所闻。巴利
‘‘Kathañhi bhagavā tuyhaṃ, sāvako sāsane rato; Appattamānaso sekkho, kālaṃkayirā jane sutā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.159) –
在这里,阿罗汉果被称为“意(mānasa)”。不过在这个语境里,意(mano)本身就是意(mānasa),这个词只是根据文句表达的需要而扩展出来的形式。巴利
Ettha arahattaṃ ‘‘mānasa’’nti vuttaṃ. Idha pana mano eva mānasaṃ, byañjanavasena hetaṃ padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ.
“心脏”就是指心。在“我要把你的心扔出去,把你的心脏击碎”这句话里,胸腔被叫作“心脏”。在“以心测知心”这句话里,指的是心。在“肾脏、心脏”里,指的是心所依处。但在这里,是就内在的意义,把心本身叫作“心脏”。而就清净的意义,称它为“洁白”,这是针对有分心说的。正如所说:“比丘们,这颗心是光明的,但它被客来的随烦恼所染污。”又因为不善法也是从它生起的,就像从恒河流出的河叫恒河,从戈达瓦里河流出的河叫戈达瓦里河一样,所以它也被称为“洁白”。巴利
Hadayanti cittaṃ. ‘‘Cittaṃ vā te khipissāmi, hadayaṃ vā te phālessāmī’’ti (su. ni. āḷavakasuttaṃ; saṃ. ni. 1.237; 246) ettha uro ‘‘hadaya’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Hadayā hadayaṃ maññe aññāya tacchatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.63) ettha cittaṃ. ‘‘Vakkaṃ hadaya’’nti (khu. pā. 3.dvatiṃsākāro; dī. ni. 2.377; ma. ni. 1.110) ettha hadayavatthu. Idha pana cittameva abbhantaraṭṭhena ‘‘hadaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Tameva parisuddhaṭṭhena paṇḍaraṃ, bhavaṅgaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘pabhassaramidaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, tañca kho āgantukehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭha’’nti (a. ni. 1.49). Tato nikkhantattā pana akusalampi gaṅgāya nikkhantā nadī gaṅgā viya godhāvarito nikkhantā godhāvarī viya ca ‘‘paṇḍara’’ntveva vuttaṃ.
意与意处:这里把意拿来称为意处,是为了说明意本身就是处。由此表明:“并不是像天处那样,因为它是意的处才成为意处;而是意本身就是处,所以叫意处。”在这里,处应当从住处、矿藏、汇集之处、出生地、原因这几种意义来理解。比如世间说“自在天处”“婆薮天处”等,这里的处是住处;“金处”“银处”等,这里的处是矿藏。而在佛教教法中,“在可爱的处所,有智慧的人亲近它”等,这里的处是汇集之处;“南方是牛的出生地”等,这里的处是出生地;“在每一个处都成为可证知的,只要有处现前”等,这里的处是原因。在这里,从出生地、汇集之处、原因这三种意义中的任何一种来理解都可以。巴利
Mano manāyatananti idha pana manoggahaṇaṃ manasseva āyatanabhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Tenetaṃ dīpeti ‘‘nayidaṃ devāyatanaṃ viya manassa āyatanattā manāyatanaṃ, atha kho mano eva āyatanaṃ manāyatana’’nti. Tattha nivāsaṭṭhānaṭṭhena ākaraṭṭhena samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṭṭhena sañjātidesaṭṭhena kāraṇaṭṭhena ca āyatanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi loke ‘‘issarāyatanaṃ, vāsudevāyatana’’ntiādīsu nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘āyatana’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Suvaṇṇāyatanaṃ, rajatāyatana’’ntiādīsu ākaro. Sāsane pana ‘‘manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vibhaṅgamā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.38) samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Dakkhiṇāpatho gunnaṃ āyatana’’ntiādīsu sañjātideso. ‘‘Tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṃ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.102; 5.23; ma. ni. 3.158) kāraṇaṃ. Idha pana sañjātidesaṭṭhena samosaraṇaṭhānaṭṭhena kāraṇaṭṭhenāti tidhāpi vaṭṭati.
触等法在这里生起,所以从“生起处”这个意义上,这里也叫“处”。外在的色、声、香、味、触以所缘的方式进入这里,所以从“汇聚之处”这个意义上,也叫“处”。而(此意处)以俱生缘等缘性作为触等法之因,所以从“因”这个意义上,也应知道它叫“处”。那(意)以思量为特相,发挥根的作用,所以叫“根”;意本身就是根,所以叫“意根”。巴利
Phassādayo hi dhammā ettha sañjāyantīti sañjātidesaṭṭhenapi etaṃ āyatanaṃ. Bahiddhā rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbā ārammaṇabhāvenettha osarantīti samosaraṇaṭhānaṭṭhenapi āyatanaṃ. Phassādīnaṃ pana sahajātādipaccayaṭṭhena kāraṇattā kāraṇaṭṭhenapi āyatananti veditabbaṃ. Tadeva mananalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, mano eva indriyaṃ manindriyaṃ.
“了知”,所以叫“识”。识本身就是蕴,就是识蕴。它的含义要从“聚集”等方面来理解。在“称为大水聚”这句里,是以“聚集”的意思说“蕴”;在“戒蕴、定蕴”等说法里,是以“功德”的意思说“蕴”;在“世尊看见一个大木聚”这句里,是仅就概念假名而说“蕴”。但在这里,是依世俗惯用语而说“蕴”。因为从“聚集”的意思来说,识蕴的一部分就是一个识。所以,就像砍树的一部分时,会说“砍树”一样,同样地,作为一个识蕴组成部分的单个识,也依世俗惯用语而称为“识蕴”。巴利
Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ. Viññāṇameva khandho viññāṇakkhandho. Tassa rāsiādivasena attho veditabbo. ‘‘Mahāudakakkhandhotveva saṅkhaṃ gacchatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.51) ettha hi rāsaṭṭhena khandho vutto. ‘‘Sīlakkhandho samādhikkhandho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.555) guṇaṭṭhena. ‘‘Addasā kho bhagavā mahantaṃ dārukkhandha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.241-242) ettha paṇṇattimattaṭṭhena. Idha pana ruḷhito khandho vutto. Rāsaṭṭhena hi viññāṇakkhandhassa ekadeso ekaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Tasmā yathā rukkhassa ekadesaṃ chindanto ‘‘rukkhaṃ chindatī’’ti vuccati, evameva viññāṇakkhandhassa ekadesabhūtaṃ ekampi viññāṇaṃ rūḷhito ‘‘viññāṇakkhandho’’ti vuttaṃ.
与那些触等法相适合的意识界,就是“随彼意识界”。在这个句子里,同一个心,从思量的作用说是“意”,从了知的作用说是“识”,从自性的作用或没有众生的作用说是“界”,所以用三个名称来说它。“俱行”是不分离。“俱生”是一起生起(一同生起,意为不离开彼此而生起)。“俱杂”是混在一起而存在。“相应”是以相同的方式结合。以哪些方式呢?以同一生起等方式。难道没有任何法与任何法相应吗?确实如此。所以,在否定这个问题时,《论事》里说:“难道不是有一些法与一些法俱行、俱生、俱杂、同一生起、同一灭、同一依处、同一所缘吗?”这样,以同一生起等为根据,说了相应之义。因此,以这些同一生起等相同的方式结合,就是“相应”。“同一生起”是一起生起,意思是不相离。“同一灭”是一起灭。“同一依处”是依心所依而同一依处。“同一所缘”是依色等而同一所缘。巴利
Tajjā manoviññāṇadhātūti tesaṃ phassādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ anucchavikā manoviññāṇadhātu. Imasmiñhi pade ekameva cittaṃ minanaṭṭhena mano, vijānanaṭṭhena viññāṇaṃ, sabhāvaṭṭhena nissattaṭṭhena vā dhātūti tīhi nāmehi vuttaṃ. Sahagatoti avijahito. Sahajātoti saddhiṃ niggato. Saṃsaṭṭhoti saṃsaggo hutvā ṭhito. Sampayuttoti samaṃ pakārehi yutto. Katamehi pakārehīti? Ekuppādādīhi. Natthi keci dhammā kehici dhammehi sampayuttāti? Āmantā. Iti hi imassa pañhassa paṭikkhepe ‘‘nanu atthi keci dhammā kehici dhammehi sahagatā sahajātā saṃsaṭṭhā ekuppādā ekanirodhā ekavatthukā ekārammaṇā’’ti (kathā. 473) evaṃ ekuppādatādīnaṃ vasena sampayogattho vutto. Iti imehi ekuppādatādīhi samaṃ pakārehi yutto sampayutto. Ekuppādoti ekato uppanno, na vināti attho. Ekanirodhoti ekato nirodho. Ekavatthukoti hadayavatthuvasena ekavatthuko. Ekārammaṇoti rūpādivasena ekārammaṇo.
在这里,“俱行”这个词在佛陀的教法中出现在五种含义里:本性、混杂、所缘、依止、相杂。比如“这种渴爱能带来再生,与喜贪俱行”,这里应当理解为本性义,意思是它本身就是喜贪。“诸比丘,若考察与懈怠俱行、与懈怠相应”,这里是混杂义,意思是其间被生起的懈怠所混杂。“得到与色俱行的等至,或得到与无色俱行的等至”,这里是所缘义,意思是以色为所缘或以无色为所缘。“修习与骨想俱行的念觉支”,这里是依止义,意思是依止骨想、修习骨想而获得。“此乐与此喜俱行、俱生、相应”,这里是相杂义,意思是混合在一起。此处也是取相杂义。巴利
Ettha sahagatasaddo tabbhāve, vokiṇṇe, ārammaṇe, nissaye, saṃsaṭṭheti pañcasu atthesu dissati jinavacane. ‘‘Yāyaṃ taṇhā ponobhavikā nandirāgasahagatā’’ti (mahāva. 14; vibha. 203; ma. ni. 3.374; saṃ. ni. 5.1081; paṭi. ma. 2.30) ettha tabbhāve veditabbo, nandirāgabhūtāti attho. ‘‘Yā, bhikkhave, vīmaṃsā kosajjasahagatā kosajjasampayuttā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.832) ettha vokiṇṇe, antarantarā uppajjamānena kosajjena vokiṇṇāti ayamettha attho. ‘‘Lābhī hoti rūpasahagatānaṃ vā samāpattīnaṃ arūpasahagatānaṃ vā samāpattīna’’nti (pu. pa. 3-6) ettha ārammaṇe, rūpārammaṇānaṃ arūpārammaṇānanti attho. ‘‘Aṭṭhikasaññāsahagataṃ satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.238) ettha nissaye, aṭṭhikasaññaṃ nissāya aṭṭhikasaññaṃ bhāvetvā paṭiladdhanti attho. ‘‘Idaṃ sukhaṃ imāya pītiyā sahagataṃ hoti sahajātaṃ sampayutta’’nti (vibha. 578) ettha saṃsaṭṭhe, saṃmissanti attho. Imasmimpi ṭhāne saṃsaṭṭhe āgato.
“俱生”这个词,就像在“俱生、前生、后生”这样的用法里,指的是俱生。“相杂”这个词,在“与在家人相杂”以及“尊者,像这样相杂”这类说法里,指的是交往、混处;在“舍弃瘦马肥马,选相似的马套上”这里,指的是同类。巴利
Sahajātasaddo ‘‘sahajātaṃ purejātaṃ pacchājāta’’nti (paṭṭha. 1.1.435) ettha viya sahajāte. Saṃsaṭṭhasaddo ‘‘gihīhi saṃsaṭṭho’’ti ca, ‘‘evaṃ saṃsaṭṭho, bhante’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.3) cāti evamādīsu saṃsagge. ‘‘Kise thūle vivajjetvā saṃsaṭṭhā yojitā hayā’’ti (jā. 2.22.70) ettha sadise.
苦楝树围绕在四周,那棵芒果树是你的,哦,骑酪者。
根和根互相混在一起,枝条和枝条彼此接触。巴利
‘‘Pucimandaparivāro, ambo te dadhivāhana; Mūlaṃ mūlena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ, sākhā sākhā nisevare’’ti. (jā. 1.2.72) –
在这里,“累积”是指:在“与心俱杂的诸法”这句中,指的是与心相应的法。但在这里,说的是那种在给出果报时不分离的法,它不作分离,具有俱生起等性质,所以称为“相应”。这就是它所涉及的范围。或者,说了“俱行”之后,为了显示它并不像随后跟随而来的经文所说的那样,所以说了“俱生”;为了显示它也不像同时生起的色法与无色法那样,所以说了“俱杂”。巴利
Ettha upacite. ‘‘Cittasaṃsaṭṭhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 59) ettha cittasampayuttadhamme . Idha pana yo phalappadāne aviyogadhammo vinibbhogaṃ akatvā ekuppādādidhammo hutvā ‘‘sampayutto’’ti vuccati. Taṃvisayo. Atha vā ‘‘sahagato’’ti vatvā pacchato pacchato āgatasuttena viya so na hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sahajāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekato uppannarūpārūpaṃ viya sopi na hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘saṃsaṭṭho’’ti vuttaṃ.
就像牛奶和水那样,它也不是这样的,为了说明这一点,所以说了“相应”。因为从无法被分开这个意义上说,确实有同时生起的法是与心相应的,就像牛奶和油一样;也有不相应的,就像从牛奶中分离出来的酥油,或者像从牛奶中取出的新鲜奶油。为了说明具有这种特征的相应者,只具有同一刹那生起等特征,所以说了“同一刹那生起”等。在这里,同一刹那生起和同时生起有什么差别?生起之间没有间隔,就是“同一刹那生起”。为了说明它不像仅因前食和后食的差别而仿佛只是同一天生起那样——就像牛奶被搅拌、再搅拌时才显现的新鲜奶油——所以说“同时生起”,意思是同一刹那产生。“同一住处”,是指从依止的意义上,以同一个范围而同一住处,就像两位比丘同住一个住处,没有位置上的间隔。“同一所缘”,是指所缘并非不定,不像眼识那样。有些论师是这样解释的。巴利
Khīrodakaṃ viya ca sopi na hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sampayutto’’ti vuttaṃ. Vinibbhogaṃ kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṭṭhena hi sahuppannā dhammā sampayuttāpi atthi khīratelaṃ viya. Tathā vippayuttāpi khīrato apanītaṃ navanītaṃ viya. Evaṃ lakkhaṇasampayutto ekuppādādilakkhaṇoyeva hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ekuppādo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ekuppādasahajātānaṃ kiṃ nānattaṃ? Uppāde antaravirahito ekuppādo. Khīrakālamuttassāpi dadhino mathane mathane pākaṭaṃ navanītaṃ viya purebhattapacchābhattavasena ekadivasameva jāto viya so na hotīti dassetuṃ ekakkhaṇe nibbattoti sahajāto. Ekavatthukoti patiṭṭhaṭṭhena ekaparicchedena ekavatthuko, dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ekavatthukatā viya ṭhānantaravirahito. Ekārammaṇoti aniyatekārammaṇo na cakkhuviññāṇaṃ viyāti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
“死”(macca)是根本词。在色等对象上执著、被系缚,就是“有情”(satto)。经中确实这样说:“尊者,人们常说‘有情、有情’,尊者,到底怎样才叫‘有情’呢?罗陀,对色有欲、有贪、有喜、有渴爱,在那里被系住、被黏缚,所以叫‘有情’。”或者,因为与有情性结合,所以叫“有情”。趋向善趣和恶趣的,叫“人”(naro)。摩奴的儿子,叫“摩纳婆”(mānavo)。用资具自己养育自己的,叫“士夫”(poso)。“补”(puṃ)指地狱,沉入其中的,叫“补特伽罗”(puggalo)。持守命根的,叫“命者”(jīvo)。从死再生,叫“往生者”(jāgu)。衰老败坏的,叫“生类”(jantu)。以根而行的,叫“因陀行”(indagu)。或者,以自在之业而行的,叫“因陀行”。也有读作“兴陀行”(hindagu)的。“兴陀”(hinda)指死亡,趋向它的,叫“兴陀行”(hindagu)。从摩奴出生的,叫“人子”(manujo)。所享受的,即享受色等对象。其余按前面所说的方式理解。从此以后,总结所说的义理,因此世尊说:巴利
Maccoti mūlapadaṃ. Rūpādīsu satto laggo laggitoti satto. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘satto sattoti, bhante, vuccati, kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, ‘satto’ti vuccatīti? Rūpe kho, rādha, yo chando yo rāgo yā nandī yā taṇhā, tatra satto tatra visatto, tasmā ‘satto’ti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.161; mahāni. 7). Sattayogena vā satto. Sugatiduggatiṃ naratīti naro. Manuno puttoti mānavo. Upakaraṇena sayaṃ posayatīti poso. Puṃ vuccati nirayo, taṃ galatīti puggalo. Jīvitindriyaṃ dhāretīti jīvo. Cutito jātiṃ gacchatīti jāgu. Jiyatīti jantu. Indriyena gacchatīti indagu. Atha vā indabhūtena kammunā gacchatīti indagu. ‘‘Hindagū’’tipi pāḷi. Hindanti maraṇaṃ, taṃ gacchatīti hindagu. Manuto jātoti manujo. Yaṃ sādiyatīti yaṃ rūpādiṃ assādiyati. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ito paraṃ vuttamatthaṃ nigamento tenāha bhagavā –
想要欲乐的人……得到之后,凡人想要什么就想要什么。巴利
‘‘Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa…pe… laddhā macco yadicchatī’’ti;
从这里往后,不再一一说明这些,只讲其中不同的地方。巴利
Ito paraṃ ettakampi avatvā visesamattameva vakkhāma.
2 当那个人想要欲乐时,是说那个人正在渴求诸欲,或者被欲贪所驱使。已生起欲求,是说已经生起了渴爱。众生的,是指有情的。若那些欲乐衰灭,是说如果那些欲乐退失减损。就像被箭射中一样受苦,是说那时他就像被铁箭等射中的人一样,备受折磨。从这里往后,跳过已经说过的内容,在未说及者中,凡不清楚之处,我将一一加以说明。巴利
2.Tassace kāmayānassāti tassa puggalassa kāme icchamānassa, kāmena vā yāyamānassa. Chandajātassāti jātataṇhassa. Jantunoti sattassa. Te kāmā parihāyantīti te kāmā parihāyanti ce. Sallaviddhova ruppatīti atha so ayomayādinā sallena viddho viya pīḷīyati. Ito paraṃ vuttaṃ vajjetvā avuttesu yaṃ yaṃ anuttānaṃ, taṃ tadeva kathayissāmi.
“行进”是指以抵达能令眼愉悦的所缘的方式而前往。“导出”是指因为好看而变得可爱,以所缘的方式引导过去。“被冲走”是指成为可听之后,以能令耳孔愉悦的所缘之力,把人牵引过去。“被集中”是指成为可忆念之后,以能令心愉悦的所缘之力,将心摄取并汇聚过来。这里的“如同”是一个表示譬喻的不变词。“以象行进”是指乘象车而行;这里的“或”是表示选择的意思。“以马行进”是指乘马车而行。套上牛轭等套具的车就是牛车,以那样的牛车而行。羊车等也依此类推。以可意的方式而生起、已善生起。巴利
Cakkhupīṇanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ pāpuṇanavasena yāyati gacchati . Dassanīyavasena piyattaṃ ārammaṇavasena appāpetīti niyyati. Savanīyaṃ hutvā kaṇṇasotapīṇanaṃ ārammaṇavasena parikaḍḍhatīti vuyhati. Saritabbaṃ hutvā cittapīṇanaṃ ārammaṇavasena gahetvā upasaṃharīyatīti saṃharīyati. Yathāti opammatthe nipāto. Hatthinā yāyati gacchatīti hatthiyānena vā, vāiti vikappatthe. Assena yāyati gacchatīti assayānena vā. Goyuttaṃ vayhādiyānaṃ goyānaṃ, tena goyānena. Ajayānādīsupi eseva nayo. Iṭṭhavasena jāto sañjāto.
以所缘可爱之力而生起、已生起。以所缘悦意之性而显现。或者,应知:以欲贪之力而生起、已生起;以欲乐之力而生起、已生起;以欲爱之力、以欲贪著之力、以欲欲之力、以欲热恼之力而显现。巴利
Ārammaṇapiyattavasena nibbatto abhinibbatto. Ārammaṇamanāpabhāvena pātubhūto. Atha vā kāmarāgavasena jāto sañjāto. Kāmanandivasena nibbatto abhinibbatto. Kāmataṇhāvasena kāmasinehavasena kāmacchandavasena kāmapariḷāhavasena ca pātubhūtoti veditabbo.
或者,那些欲乐衰亡,意思是那些事物之欲等欲乐衰亡、消失。或者,他从那些欲乐中衰亡,意思是这位刹帝利等个人从那些事物之欲等欲乐中衰亡、消失,就像“财物先舍弃人,人比财物更早舍弃”这类说法一样。如何呢?是以什么方式呢?就在还存续的时候,意思是在还在维持的时候。那些财物,意思是那些事物之欲等财物。国王们,意思是大地等领土的国王们。拿走,意思是拿了就走,或者夺取。盗贼们,意思是破墙而入等类的盗贼。火,意思是森林大火等类的火。烧毁,意思是焚烧,化为灰烬。水,意思是洪水等类的水。冲走,意思是抓取后带到大海。不可意者,意思是不喜欢的、不悦意的。继承人拿走,意思是没有继承权、没有主人者拿走。隐藏的,意思是已经储藏、安放好的财物。他找不到,意思是他不能发现、不能获得,也就是看不见的意思。不善经营,意思是以不正确的方式所从事的耕作、商业等事业。破坏,意思是达到破裂,无法继续运行的意思。应当知道,在“无车者车坏”等文句中,也有这种可能性。巴利
Te vā kāmā parihāyantīti te vatthukāmādayo parihāyanti vigacchanti. So vā kāmehi parihāyatīti eso khattiyādipuggalo vatthukāmādikāmehi parihāyati vigacchati ‘‘pubbeva maccaṃ vijahanti bhogā, macco dhane pubbataraṃ jahātī’’ti (jā. 1.5.2) evamādīsu viya. Kathanti kena pakārena. Tiṭṭhantassevāti dharantasseva. Te bhogeti te vatthukāmādayo bhoge. Rājāno vāti pathabyādirājāno. Harantīti gahetvā gacchanti, apaharanti vā. Corā vāti sandhicchedādikā. Aggi vāti dāvaggiādi. Dahatīti jhāpeti bhasmaṃ karoti. Udakaṃ vāti oghādiudakaṃ . Vahatīti gahetvā mahāsamuddaṃ pāpeti. Appiyā vāti akantā amanāpā. Dāyādā harantīti dāyajjavirahitā assāmikā haranti. Nihitaṃvāti nidhānaṃ katvā ṭhapitaṃ. Nādhigacchatīti na vindati na paṭilabhati, na passatīti attho. Duppayuttāti visamapayogena yojitā kasivāṇijjādikammantā. Bhijjantīti bhedaṃ pāpuṇanti, na pavattantīti attho. ‘‘Bhañjanti rathaṃ ayānakā’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.21.296) sambhavo veditabbo.
或者,家族里出生了一个败家子,意思是说,在刹帝利等家族中,那个把家族烧毁、成为家族最后一人的人出生了。巴利原文也写作“Kulaṅkaro”。所谓“他散尽那些财物”,是说这个家族中最后的那个人,把你那些金银等财物全都耗尽。“挥霍”是指让它们散失,远远扔开。“破坏”是指让它们消失,再也看不见。另一种说法是:因为沉迷女色而散尽;因为沉迷饮酒而挥霍;因为沉迷赌博而破坏。又或者,因为不知道收入是怎么来的而散尽;因为不知道钱财是怎么花出去的而挥霍;因为对存放财物的地方没有好好守护而破坏——应当按这些方式来理解。巴利
Kule vā kulaṅgāro uppajjatīti khattiyādikule kulajhāpako kule antimapuriso nibbattati . ‘‘Kulaṅkaro’’tipi pāḷi. Yo te bhoge vikiratīti yo eso kule pacchimako te hiraññādike bhoge khepeti. Vidhamatīti viyogaṃ karoti, dūre khipati. Viddhaṃsetīti nāseti adassanaṃ gameti. Atha vā itthidhutto hutvā vikirati. Surādhutto hutvā vidhamati. Akkhadhutto hutvā viddhaṃseti. Vikirati vā uppannaṃ āyaṃ ajānanena. Vidhamati vissajjanamukhaṃ ajānanena. Viddhaṃseti ṭhapitaṭṭhāne ārakkhaṃ asaṃvidhānenāti evamādinā yojetabbaṃ.
无常性本身就是第八项,也就是坏灭的本质就是第八项。衰亡是指逐渐看不见了。衰灭是指不再显现。消散是指从原来的位置离开。流失是指流走。消失是指走向隐没,再也看不见。崩坏是指碎成粉末之后散去。巴利
Aniccatāyeva aṭṭhamīti vināsabhāvo eva aṭṭhamo. Hāyantīti adassanaṃ yanti. Parihāyantīti na puna paññāyanti. Paridhaṃsentīti ṭhānato apagacchanti. Paripatantīti paggharanti. Antaradhāyantīti antaradhānaṃ adassanaṃ gacchanti. Vippalujjantīti cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā apagacchanti.
当财物尚存之时,即那些财富存在的时期,犹如“tiṭṭhante nibbute cāpī”等句中的用法。“他”即那位拥有财富的人。他从天界死去,从人界死去,从龙界、金翅鸟界等崩坏。或者也可说:以谷仓的方式衰亡,以宝库的方式衰灭,以耕牛、象、马等的方式消散,以奴婢的方式流失,以妻子、装饰等的方式消失,以水等的方式灭坏——有些人是这样解释的。巴利
Tiṭṭhantevate bhogeti tesaṃ dhanānaṃ ṭhitakāle ‘‘tiṭṭhante nibbute cāpī’’ti evamādīsu (vi. va. 806) viya. Soti so bhogasāmiko puggalo. Cavati devalokato. Marati manussalokato. Vippalujjati nāgasupaṇṇādilokato. Atha vā hāyati dhaññakoṭṭhāgāravasena. Parihāyati dhanakoṭṭhāgāravasena. Paridhaṃsati balibaddahatthiassādivasena. Paripatati dāsidāsavasena. Antaradhāyati dārābharaṇavasena. Nassati udakādivasenāti eke vaṇṇayanti.
铁制的,就是用黑铁之类做成的。箭,就是箭矢。骨制的,就是除了人骨之外,用其他骨头做成的。牙制的,就是用象牙之类做成的。角制的,就是用牛角之类做成的。木制的,就是用竹子、木头之类做成的。被刺伤,就是被上面说的任何一种箭射中。被折磨,就是被扰乱,发生变异。被激怒,就是内心动摇,生起忿怒。被触恼,就是被碰触而恼火。被压迫,就是受到压迫。受到打击的人就会被激怒。也有人这样解释:第三天插入探针时,以及在清洗时,被触恼;在施碱时,被压迫;或者在击打清洗时,被折磨;在那苦产生时,被激怒;在插入探针时,被压迫;在施碱时,被触恼。巴利
Ayomayenāti kāḷalohādinibbattena. Sallenāti kaṇḍena. Aṭṭhimayenāti manussaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapetvā avasesena. Dantamayenāti hatthidantādinā. Visāṇamayenāti govisāṇādinā. Kaṭṭhamayenāti veḷukaṭṭhādinā. Viddhoti vuttappakārasallānaṃ aññataraññatarena pahaṭo. Ruppatīti vikirati, vikāraṃ āpajjati. Kuppatīti calati, kopaṃ uppādeti. Ghaṭṭīyatīti ghaṭṭito hoti. Pīḷīyatīti pīḷito hoti, laddhappahāro kuppati. ‘‘Tatiyadivase salākaṃ pavesetvā dhovanakāle ghaṭṭīyati. Khārappadāne pīḷīyati. Pahāradhovane vā ruppati. Tasmiṃ dukkhuppādane kuppati. Salākapavesane pīḷīyati. Khārappadāne ghaṭṭīyatī’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
被疾病折磨是指受到打击而受苦。陷入忧愁是指陷入悲伤。由于变异和改变状态是指:舍弃了原本的状态,被带入另一种状态,于是内心枯竭等忧愁、言语错乱等悲泣、身体被逼迫等苦、心被逼迫等忧,以及强烈的疲惫和绝望。以上所说的愁等,便生起并现行。巴利
Byādhitoti laddhappahāro hutvā pīḷito. Domanassitoti domanassappatto. Vipariṇāmaññathābhāvāti pakatibhāvaṃ jahitvā aññathābhāvaṃ upanītena, antososādi soko ca vācāvippalāpo paridevo ca kāyapīḷanādi dukkhañca cittapīḷanādi domanassañca bhuso āyāso upāyāso ca. Ete vuttappakārā sokādayo uppajjanti samudācāraṃ gacchanti.
3 第三颂的简要含义是:如果有人对这些欲乐,通过镇伏欲贪或者彻底断除欲贪来避开它们,就像用脚避开蛇头一样,那么这位比丘因为安住在遍满整个世间的状态中,所以能保持正念,超越世间中被称为“粘着”的渴爱。巴利
3. Tatiyagāthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yo pana ime kāme tattha chandarāgavikkhambhanena vā samucchedena vā attano pādena sappassa siraṃ viya parivajjeti, so bhikkhu sabbalokaṃ vipphāretvā ṭhitattā loke visattikāsaṅkhātaṃ taṇhaṃ sato hutvā samativattatīti.
“Yo”是一个需要分别解释的词。“Yo yādiso”等则是用来分别解释它的词。这里,因为“yo”是一个表示实义的词,而且它不加限定地指某个人,所以为了说明它的含义,就用了这个不加限定地指人的“yo”一词。因此,这里的含义应当这样理解:“yo”就是任何一个。因为无论哪一个,都必定会依其性别、所相应的工作、所安排的方式、所属的类型、所达到的地位、所具备的法,以某种方式被人认知,所以为了让人知道这些差别并加以阐明,就说了“yādiso”等词。其中,“yādiso”的意思是:就性别来说,无论他是这样或那样——高或矮、黑或白、肤色像鲇鱼、瘦或胖。巴利
Yoti vibhajitabbaṃ padaṃ. Yo yādisotiādīni tassa vibhajanapadāni. Ettha ca yasmā yoti atthapadaṃ. tañca aniyamena puggalaṃ dīpeti. Tasmā tassa atthaṃ dassento aniyamena puggaladīpakaṃ yo-saddameva āha. Tasmā ettha evamattho veditabbo – yoti yo kocīti. Yasmā yo yo koci nāma, so avassaṃ yathāliṅgayathāyuttayathāvihitayathāppakārayaṃṭhānapattayaṃdhammasamannāgatavasena ekenākārena paññāyati, tasmā taṃ tattha ñāpetuṃ taṃ bhedaṃ pakāsento ‘‘yādiso’’tiādimāha. Tattha yādisoti liṅgavasena yādiso vā tādiso vā hotu, dīgho vā rasso vā kāḷo vā odāto vā maṅguracchavi vā kiso vā thūlo vāti attho.
所谓“如其所应”,就是按所从事的职责来说,无论承担什么职责都行——可能是营造事务,可能是教诵事务,也可能是住处事务。“如所安排”,就是按被安置的方式来说,比如被任命为营造监督等。“如其类型”,就是按所表现的类型来说,比如成为引路者、领导者等。“达到某种地位”,就是达到了某种地位,比如达到将军、大商主等职位。“具备某种法”,就是具备了某种法,比如头陀支等。巴利
Yathāyuttoti yogavasena yena vā tena vā yutto hotu, navakammayutto vā uddesayutto vā vāsadhurayutto vāti attho. Yathāvihitoti yathāṭhapito navakammādhiṭṭhāyikādivasena. Yathāpakāroti yathāpakārena patiṭṭhito padīpanāyakādivasena. Yaṃṭhānappattoti yaṃ ṭhānantaraṃ patto senāpatiseṭṭhiṭṭhānādivasena. Yaṃdhammasamannāgatoti yena dhammena upāgato dhutaṅgādivasena.
或者,从镇伏的角度来说,就是通过近行定和安止定,让烦恼被远远隔开,就像用棍棒把苔藓打散一样。或者,从彻底断除的角度来说,就是通过圣道让烦恼再也不生起,从根本上把它们连根拔除,以这种舍断的方式来说断除。像骸骨喻所说的诸欲等十一个词,是就观的角度来说的。巴利
Vikkhambhanato vāti upacārappanāsamādhīti kilesānaṃ dūrīkaraṇato vā ghaṭappahārena sevālānaṃ viya. Samucchedato vāti puna appavattiṃ katvā accantato maggena kilesānaṃ ucchinnamūlato pahānavasena samucchedato vā. Aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmātiādīni ekādasa padāni vipassanāvasena vuttāni.
修习佛随念等六项,以及修习死随念、修习寂止随念,这些是依近行定而说的。修习入出息念、修习身至念、修习初禅,直到修习非想非非想处定,这些是依安止定而说的。其中,如骸骨喻的诸欲,意思是:这些欲的譬喻,就像一根剔得干干净净、挖去了骨髓、没有肉、沾满血的白骨聚。以少味之义,是为了显示此处乐味微小有限,而过患更大。观察,是指以智慧眼去审察,即然而那只狗只是承受着疲劳与苦恼。回避,是指远远避开。因为世尊曾这样说过:巴利
Buddhānussatiṃ bhāventopītiādīni cha padāni maraṇassatiṃ bhāventopi, upasamānussatiṃ bhāventopīti imāni ca upacārajjhānavasena vuttāni. Ānāpānassatiṃ bhāventopi, kāyagatāsatiṃ bhāventopi, paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ bhāventopītiādīni nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ bhāventopīti pariyosānāni appanājjhānavasena vuttāni. Tattha aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmāti sunikkantaṃ nikkantaṃ nimmaṃsaṃ lohitamakkhitaṃ aṭṭhikaṅkalaṃ upamā etesaṃ kāmānanti aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā. Appassādaṭṭhenāti ‘‘appaṃ parittaṃ sukhassādaṃ ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’’ti dassanaṭṭhena. Passantoti ‘‘yāvadeva pana so kukkuro kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti ñāṇacakkhunā passanto. Parivajjetīti dūraṅgameti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
居士,好比一只被饥饿和虚弱折磨的狗,站在屠牛者的砧板旁边。一个熟练的屠牛者或屠牛者的学徒,会把一根剔得干干净净、骨髓已除、没有肉、沾满血的白骨扔到它面前。居士,你怎么想?那只狗啃着那根剔得干干净净、骨髓已除、没有肉、沾满血的白骨,能解除它的饥饿和虚弱吗?不能,尊者。为什么呢?尊者,因为那根白骨剔得干干净净、骨髓已除、没有肉、沾满血,那只狗只会落得疲惫和苦恼。正是如此,居士,圣弟子这样思惟:世尊说诸欲如白骨聚,苦多、忧患多,其中的过患更大。他这样以正慧如实看见之后,就避开那种依于种种差异的舍,而去修习那种依于单一、专一的舍——在这种舍中,对世间一切利养的执取都无余灭尽。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi , gahapati, kukkuro jighacchādubbalyapareto goghātakasūnaṃ paccupaṭṭhito assa, tamenaṃ dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā aṭṭhikaṅkalaṃ sunikkantaṃ nikkantaṃ nimmaṃsaṃ lohitamakkhitaṃ upasumbheyya. Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, gahapati, api nu kho so kukkuro amhaṃ aṭṭhikaṅkalaṃ sunikkantaṃ nikkantaṃ nimmaṃsaṃ lohitamakkhitaṃ palehanto jighacchādubbalyaṃ paṭivineyyā’’ti? ‘‘No hetaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Taṃ kissa hetu’’? ‘‘Aduñhi, bhante, aṭṭhikaṅkalaṃ sunikkantaṃ nikkantaṃ nimmaṃsaṃ lohitamakkhitaṃ, yāvadeva pana so kukkuro kilamathassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti. ‘‘Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti. Evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya disvā yāyaṃ upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā , taṃ abhinivajjetvā yāyaṃ upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā, yattha sabbaso lokāmisupādānā aparisesā nirujjhanti, tamevūpekkhaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.42).
这些欲的譬喻,就像秃鹫等共同争抢的肉块,所以叫“肉块喻”。因为是被众多众生共同争夺的,所以叫“多共”。这些欲的譬喻,就像一把燃烧的草炬,所以叫“草炬喻”。以烧灼之义,就是烧到手等肢体的意思。这些欲的譬喻,就像一个超过一人深、充满无焰无烟炭火的炭坑,所以叫“炭坑喻”。以大热苦之义,就是带来极大灼烧之苦的意思。这些欲的譬喻,就像梦见园林美景等一样的梦,所以叫“梦喻”。以短暂显现之义,就是还没得到、还没接近就已消失的意思。这些欲的譬喻,就像靠乞求才得到的车乘等物品,所以叫“借用品喻”。以暂时存续之义,就是不能长久持有的意思。这些欲的譬喻,就像一棵果实累累的树,所以叫“树果喻”。以折断摧坏之义,就是折断树枝,以及从四周摧折使树倒毁的意思。这些欲的譬喻,就像刀与砧板,所以叫“刀砧喻”。以切割斩剁之义,就是斩断的意思。这些欲的譬喻,就像枪与矛,所以叫“枪矛喻”。以贯穿之义,就是穿透而过的意思。这些欲的譬喻,就像令人恐惧的蛇头,所以叫“蛇头喻”。以具怖畏之义,就是令面对者心生恐惧的意思。这些欲的譬喻,就像能生苦的一堆大火,所以叫“大火聚喻”。以大炽热之义,就是能引生极大身苦灼烧的意思,因此应当远离诸欲。这正如所说的——巴利
Gijjhādīhi sādhāraṇā maṃsapesi upamā etesanti maṃsapesūpamā. Bahūnaṃ sādhāraṇaṭṭhena bahusādhāraṇā. Ādittaṃ tiṇukkaṃ upamā etesanti tiṇukkūpamā. Anudahanaṭṭhenāti hatthādijhāpanaṭṭhena. Sādhikaporisappamāṇā vītaccikānaṃ vītadhūmānaṃ aṅgārānaṃ pūrā aṅgārakāsu upamā etesanti aṅgārakāsūpamā. Mahāpariḷāhaṭṭhenāti mahantaparitāpanaṭṭhena. Ārāmarāmaṇeyyādikaṃ supinaṃ upamā etesanti supinakūpamā. Ittarapaccupaṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti appatvā, na upagantvā tiṭṭhanaṭṭhena. Yācitena laddhaṃ yānādibhaṇḍaṃ upamā etesanti yācitakūpamā. Tāvakālikaṭṭhenāti anibandhanaṭṭhena. Sampannaphalarukkho upamā etesanti rukkhaphalūpamā. Sambhañjanaparibhañjanaṭṭhenāti sākhābhañjanaṭṭhena ceva samantato bhañjitvā rukkhapātanaṭṭhena ca. Asi ca sūnā ca upamā etesanti asisūnūpamā. Adhikuṭṭanaṭṭhenāti chindanaṭṭhena. Sattisūlaṃ upamā etesanti sattisūlūpamā. Vinivijjhanaṭṭhenāti nipatetvā gamanaṭṭhena. Bhayajananaṭṭhena sappasiraṃ upamā etesanti sappasirūpamā. Sappaṭibhayaṭṭhenāti saha abhimukhe bhayaṭṭhena. Dukkhajananaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ upamā etesanti aggikkhandhūpamā. Mahābhitāpanaṭṭhenāti mahantaabhitāpakāyapīḷāuppādanaṭṭhenāti kāmaṃ parivajjetīti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
居士,就像一只秃鹫、一只苍鹭或一只鹰,叼起一块肉飞起来,其他的秃鹫、苍鹭和鹰就追上去,一次又一次地扑向它、撕扯它,逼它丢下那块肉。居士,你怎么想?如果那只秃鹫、苍鹭或鹰不赶快丢下那块肉,它会不会因此而死,或者遭受近乎死亡的苦?是的,尊者。正是这样,居士,圣弟子这样思惟:世尊说诸欲犹如肉块……他修习那种舍。
居士,就像有人拿着一把燃烧的草炬逆风而行。居士,你怎么想?如果那个人不赶快丢下那把燃烧的草炬,那草炬会不会烧到他的手,烧到他的手臂,或者烧到身上某个部位,他会不会因此而死,或者遭受近乎死亡的苦?是的,尊者。正是这样,居士,圣弟子这样思惟:世尊说诸欲犹如草炬,苦多、忧患多……他修习那种舍。
居士,就像一个超过一人深的炭坑,里面装满了没有火焰、没有烟气的炭火。这时来了一个人,他想活命,不想死,想要快乐,厌恶痛苦。两个力气大的人抓住他两边胳膊,把他往炭坑那边拖。居士,你怎么想?那个人会不会拼命扭动身体想挣脱?是的,尊者。这是什么原因?尊者,因为那个人知道:我要是掉进这个炭坑,就会因此而死,或者遭受近乎死亡的苦。正是这样,居士,圣弟子这样思惟:世尊说诸欲犹如炭坑……他修习那种舍。
居士,就像有人梦见可爱的园林、可爱的树林、可爱的土地、可爱的池塘,醒来后什么都看不到了。正是这样,居士,圣弟子这样思惟:世尊说诸欲犹如梦境……他修习那种舍。
居士,就像有人借来财物,借来车乘,借来上等的摩尼珠耳环。他靠着这些借来的财物,前呼后拥地走在集市中。人们看见他,会这样说:这位先生真富有啊!听说富人们就是这样享受财物的。可是那些东西的主人,在哪里看到这些东西,就在哪里把它们拿走。居士,你怎么想?这足以让那个人心里发生变化吗?是的,尊者。这是什么原因?尊者,因为主人会把东西拿走。正是这样,居士,圣弟子这样思惟:世尊说诸欲犹如借用品……他修习那种舍。
居士,就像在一个村庄或城镇不远处,有一片茂密的树林。那里有一棵树,果实丰盛,果实累累,地上却没有一颗掉落的果实。这时来了一个人,他想找果实,寻求果实,四处寻找果实。他走进那片树林,看见那棵果实丰盛、果实累累的树。他心想:这棵树果实丰盛,果实累累,地上没有一颗掉落的果实,我知道怎么爬树。不如我爬上这棵树,尽情地吃,再把衣兜装满。于是他爬上那棵树,尽情地吃,把衣兜也装满了。接着又来了第二个人,他也想找果实,寻求果实,四处寻找果实,手里拿着一把锋利的斧头。他走进那片树林,看见那棵果实丰盛、果实累累的树。他心想:这棵树果实丰盛,果实累累,地上没有一颗掉落的果实,可是我不知道怎么爬树。不如我从根部把这棵树砍倒,尽情地吃,再把衣兜装满。于是他从根部把那棵树砍倒了。居士,你怎么想?那个先爬上树的人,如果不赶快下来,树倒下来的时候,会不会砸断他的手,砸断他的脚,或者砸断身上某个部位,他会不会因此而死,或者遭受近乎死亡的苦?是的,尊者。正是这样,居士,圣弟子这样思惟:世尊说诸欲犹如树果,苦多、忧患多,这里的过患更大。他这样以正慧如实看清之后,就避开那种种种的、依于种种的舍,而修习那种单一的、依于单一的舍——在那里,对世间利养的一切执取都无余息灭。他修习那种舍。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, gahapati, gijjho vā kaṅko vā kulalo vā maṃsapesiṃ ādāya uḍḍīyeyya, tamenaṃ gijjhāpi kaṅkāpi kulalāpi anupatitvā anupatitvā vitaccheyyuṃ vissajjeyyuṃ. Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, gahapati, sace so gijjho vā kaṅko vā kulalo vā taṃ maṃsapesiṃ na khippameva paṭinissajjeyya, so tatonidānaṃ maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyya , maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkha’’nti ‘‘evaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘maṃsapesūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā…pe… tamevūpekkhaṃ bhāveti. Seyyathāpi, gahapati, puriso ādittaṃ tiṇukkaṃ ādāya paṭivātaṃ gaccheyya. Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, gahapati, sace so puriso taṃ ādittaṃ tiṇukkaṃ na khippameva paṭinissajjeyya, tassa sā ādittā tiṇukkā hatthaṃ vā daheyya, bāhuṃ vā daheyya, aññataraṃ vā aññataraṃ vā aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ daheyya, so tatonidānaṃ maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyya, maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkha’’nti? ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘tiṇukkūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā…pe… tamevūpekkhaṃ bhāveti. Seyyathāpi, gahapati, aṅgārakāsu sādhikaporisā pūrā aṅgārānaṃ vītaccikānaṃ vītadhūmānaṃ. Atha puriso āgaccheyya jīvitukāmo amaritukāmo sukhakāmo dukkhappaṭikkūlo, tamenaṃ dve balavanto purisā nānābāhāsu gahetvā aṅgārakāsuṃ upakaḍḍheyyuṃ. Taṃ kiṃ maññasi gahapati, api nu so puriso iti citi ceva kāyaṃ sannāmeyyā’’ti? ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Taṃ kissahetu’’? ‘‘Viditañhi, bhante, tassa purisassa ‘imañca ahaṃ aṅgārakāsuṃ papatissāmi, tatonidānaṃ maraṇaṃ vā nigacchissāmi maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkha’’’nti. ‘‘Evameva kho gahapati ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘aṅgārakāsūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā…pe… tamevūpekkhaṃ bhāveti. Seyyathāpi, gahapati, puriso supinakaṃ passeyya ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṃ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṃ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṃ pokkharaṇirāmaṇeyyakaṃ, so paṭibuddho na kiñci paṭipasseyya. Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘supinakūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā…pe… tamevūpekkhaṃ bhāveti. Seyyathāpi, gahapati, puriso yācitakaṃ bhogaṃ yācitvā yānaṃ vā poriseyyaṃ pavaramaṇikuṇḍalaṃ. So tehi yācitakehi bhogehi purakkhato parivuto antarāpaṇaṃ paṭipajjeyya. Tamenaṃ jano disvā evaṃ vadeyya ‘bhogī vata bho puriso, evaṃ kira bho bhogino bhogāni bhuñjantī’ti. Tamenaṃ sāmikā yattha yattheva tāni passeyyuṃ, tattha tattheva tāni hareyyuṃ. Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, gahapati, alaṃ nu kho tassa purisassa aññathattāyā’’ti? ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Taṃ kissahetu’’? ‘‘Sāmino hi, bhante, tāni harantī’’ti. ‘‘Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘yācitakūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā…pe… tamevūpekkhaṃ bhāveti. Seyyathāpi, gahapati, gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre tibbo vanasaṇḍo, tatrassa rukkho sampannaphalo ca upapannaphalo ca. Na cassu kānici phalāni bhūmiyaṃ patitāni. Atha puriso āgaccheyya phalatthiko phalagavesī phalapariyesanaṃ caramāno. So taṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ ajjhogāhetvā taṃ rukkhaṃ passeyya sampannaphalañca upapannaphalañca. Tassa evamassa ‘ayaṃ kho rukkho sampannaphalo ca upapannaphalo ca, natthi ca kānici phalāni bhūmiyaṃ patitāni, jānāmi kho panāhaṃ rukkhaṃ āropituṃ. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ imaṃ rukkhaṃ ārohitvā yāvadatthañca khādeyyaṃ, ucchaṅgañca pūreyya’nti? So taṃ rukkhaṃ ārohitvā yāvadatthañca khādeyya, ucchaṅgañca pūreyya. Atha dutiyo puriso āgaccheyya phalatthiko phalagavesī phalapariyesanaṃ caramāno tiṇhaṃ kuṭhāriṃ ādāya. So taṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ ajjhogāhetvā taṃ rukkhaṃ passeyya sampannaphalañca upapannaphalañca. Tassa evamassa ‘ayaṃ kho rukkho sampannaphalo ca upapannaphalo ca, natthi ca kānici phalāni bhūmiyaṃ patitāni, na kho panāhaṃ jānāmi rukkhaṃ ārohituṃ. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ imaṃ rukkhaṃ mūlato chetvā yāvadatthañca khādeyyaṃ, ucchaṅgañca pūreyya’nti. So taṃ rukkhaṃ mūlatova chindeyya. Taṃ kiṃ maññasi , gahapati, amuko so puriso paṭhamaṃ rukkhaṃ ārūḷho, sace so na khippameva oroheyya, tassa so rukkho papatanto hatthaṃ vā bhañjeyya pādaṃ vā bhañjeyya aññataraṃ vā aññataraṃ vā aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ bhañjeyya, so tatonidānaṃ maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyya, maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkha’’nti? ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Evameva kho, gahapati, ariyasāvako iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘rukkhaphalūpamā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’ti. Evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya disvā yāyaṃ upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā, taṃ abhinivajjetvā yāyaṃ upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā. Yattha sabbaso lokāmisūpādānā aparisesā nirujjhanti. Tamevūpekkhaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.43-48).
就这样,先通过白骨聚等比喻,一直讲到火堆的比喻,来开示观(vipassanā);现在为了开示近行定,才说出“修习佛随念”等话。巴利
Evaṃ aṭṭhikaṅkalādikaaggikkhandhūpamapariyosānato vipassanaṃ dassetvā idāni upacārasamādhiṃ dassento ‘‘buddhānussatiṃ bhāvento’’tiādimāha.
在这里,因为念是一再反复生起的,所以它本身就是随念。又因为它只在自己应该运作的所缘上运作,所以对于因信心而出家的善男子来说,它是很相应的念,因此也叫随念。以佛陀为所缘而生起的念,就是佛随念。这是以阿拉汉等佛陀功德为所缘的念的别名,也就是那个佛随念。修习,就是让它增长、让它扩展。以法为所缘而生起的念,就是法随念,这是以善说等法功德为所缘的念的别名。以僧为所缘而生起的念,就是僧随念,这是以善行道等僧功德为所缘的念的别名。以戒为所缘而生起的念,就是戒随念,这是以自己戒行无缺等戒功德为所缘的念的别名。以施舍为所缘而生起的念,就是施随念,这是以自己慷慨施舍等施舍功德为所缘的念的别名。以诸天为所缘而生起的念,就是天随念,这是把诸天当作见证,然后以自己具有的信心等功德为所缘的念的别名。以入出息为所缘而生起的念,就是入出息念,这是以入出息之相为所缘的念的别名。以死为所缘而生起的念,就是死随念,这是以某一期生命里命根断绝——也就是死——为所缘的念的别名。巴利
Tattha punappunaṃ uppajjanato sati eva anussati. Pavattitabbaṭṭhānamhiyeva ca pavattattā saddhāpabbajitassa kulaputtassa anurūpā satītipi anussati. Buddhaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati buddhānussati. Arahatādibuddhaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ, taṃ buddhānussatiṃ. Bhāventoti vaḍḍhento byūhento. Dhammaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati dhammānussati, svākkhātatādidhammaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saṅghaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati saṅghānussati, suppaṭipannatādisaṅghaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sīlaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati sīlānussati, attano akhaṇḍatādisīlaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cāgaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati cāgānussati, attano muttacāgatādicāgaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Devatā ārabbha uppannā anussati devatānussati, devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā attano saddhādiguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ānāpāne ārabbha uppannā sati ānāpānassati, ānāpānanimittārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Maraṇaṃ ārabbha uppannā sati maraṇassati, ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyupacchedasaṅkhātamaraṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
身至念:身体之所以被称为“身”,是因为它是头发等可厌恶之不净物的依靠和来源。在这样被称为“身”的身体上生起、运作的念,就是身至念;或者,也可以说念到达了这样的身体,本应说成“kāyagatasati”,但没有缩短元音,而说成“kāyagatāsati”。这是以头发等身体各部分的不净相为所缘的念的别名。寂止随念:以寂止为所缘而生起的随念,就是寂止随念。这是以一切苦的寂止为所缘的念的别名。巴利
Kucchitānaṃ kesādīnaṃ paṭikkūlānaṃ āyattā ākarattā kāyoti saṅkhaṃ gate sarīre gatā pavattā sati kāyagatāsati, tādisaṃ vā kāyaṃ gatā sati ‘‘kāyagatasatī’’ti vattabbe rassaṃ akatvā ‘‘kāyagatāsatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kesādikesu kāyakoṭṭhāsesu paṭikkūlanimittārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Upasamaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati. Upasamānussati, sabbadukkhūpasamārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
正在修习与寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性相应的初禅。正在修习与喜、乐、心一境性相应的第二禅。正在修习与乐、心一境性相应的第三禅。正在修习与舍、心一境性相应的第四禅……乃至……即使正在修习非想非非想处,也还是在远离诸欲。巴利
Vitakkavicārapītisukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ bhāvento. Pītisukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ dutiyajjhānaṃ bhāvento. Sukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ tatiyajjhānaṃ bhāvento. Upekkhācittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ bhāvento…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ bhāventopi kāme parivajjetīti.
先说明了镇伏断,现在为了说明以正断的方式断除诸欲,就说了“即使修习入流道”等话。其中,进入圣道之流叫做入流,入流的道就是入流道。所谓“会导致堕入恶趣的诸欲”,是指那些会让人堕入恶趣的欲;修习入流道的人,就是以正断的方式彻底舍弃这些欲。以结生来说,只再来这个世间一次的人,叫做一来者,他的道就是一来道。修习那个道的时候,断除粗重的欲,也就是已经达到灼热程度的欲。以结生来说,不再来欲界的人,叫做不来者,他的道就是不来道。修习那个道的时候,断除随伴的欲,也就是已经变得非常微细的欲。因为远离烦恼、摧毁烦恼之敌、拆毁轮回之轮辐、作恶时无所隐匿、值得接受资具等,所以称为阿拉汉;阿拉汉的状态就是阿拉汉果。那是什么?就是阿拉汉果。通往阿拉汉果的道就是阿拉汉道。修习那个阿拉汉道的时候,以“一切方式”断尽“一切”,就是以所有行相断尽一切;以“一切形态”断尽“一切”,就是以所有种类断尽一切;“无残尽、无遗余”,就是毫无剩余,连一丝习气都不留下。或者,“以一切方式断尽一切”是就根本来说;“以一切形态断尽一切”是就行相和分位来说;“无残尽、无遗余”是就修习的分位来说。同样,第一种是以没有恶行来说,第二种是以没有缠缚来说,第三种是以没有随眠来说——有人是这样解释的。巴利
Vikkhambhanappahānaṃ dassetvā idāni samucchedena kāmānaṃ pahānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sotāpattimaggaṃ bhāventopī’’tiādimāha. Tattha maggasotassa āpajjanaṃ sotāpatti, sotāpattiyā maggo sotāpattimaggo. Apāyagamanīye kāmeti yehi apāyaṃ gacchanti, te apāyagamanīye kāme samucchedato sotāpattimaggaṃ bhāvento parivajjeti. Paṭisandhivasena sakiṃyeva imaṃ lokaṃ āgacchatīti sakadāgāmī, tassa maggo sakadāgāmimaggo. Taṃ maggaṃ bhāvento. Oḷāriketi pariḷāhappatte. Paṭisandhivaseneva kāmabhavaṃ nāgacchatīti anāgāmī, tassa maggo anāgāmimaggo. Taṃ maggaṃ bhāvento. Anusahagateti sukhumabhāvappatte. Kilesehi ārakattā, kilesārīnaṃ hatattā, saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ hatattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā ca arahaṃ, arahato bhāvo arahattaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Arahattaphalaṃ. Arahattassa maggo arahattamaggo. Taṃ arahattamaggaṃ bhāvento. Sabbena sabbanti sabbenākārena sabbaṃ. Sabbathā sabbanti sabbappakārena sabbaṃ. Asesaṃ nissesanti niravasesaṃ gandhamattampi aṭṭhapetvā. Atha vā sabbenasabbaṃ mūlavasena. Sabbathā sabbaṃ ākāranippadesavasena. Asesaṃ nissesaṃ bhāvanānippadesavasena. Tathā purimena duccaritābhāvena. Dutiyena pariyuṭṭhānābhāvena. Tatiyena anusayābhāvena evameke vaṇṇayanti.
“蛇”这个词,被称为ahi,指的是一切蜿蜒爬行的东西。以什么含义呢?以什么含义呢?因为它正确地蜿蜒爬行,所以叫蛇。“弯曲而行”是指弯弯曲曲地走。“低头”是指把头伏下来。“以头而睡”是指把头放在盘卷中间,以睡卧的状态用头来睡,所以叫虺蛇。“睡在洞穴里”就是穴居者。“睡在洞里”就是洞居者,这也是巴利语读法,那个读法很好。“睡在洞穴里”就是穴居者。“它的牙是武器”:这条蛇的两颗牙,就是被称为打击工具的武器。“它的毒是可怖的”:这条蛇的毒,是被称为能扩散的毒,是凶猛、粗硬的。“它的舌是两分的”:这条蛇的舌头分成两叉。“用两舌尝味”:它用两叉的舌头去了知味道、领受乐味、享用味道。“想活命”就是想要活命。“想不死”就是想要不死。“想得乐”就是想要得到乐。“厌逆苦”就是不想要苦。“用脚”:用自己的脚。“蛇头”:蛇的头。“应避开”:应从远处避开。“应回避”:应按它的范围避开。“应遍避”:应从四周避开。“应极避”:应以第四种尺度彻底避开。或者也可以说:第一种是从头那边避开,第二、第三种是从两侧避开,第四种是从后面避开。有些人这样解释:“对于尚未得到的诸欲,应以寻求所引生的苦为理由而避开;对于已经得到的诸欲,应以守护所引生的苦为理由而回避;应以无明灼热之苦为理由而遍避;应以坏灭之际与所爱别离之苦为理由而极避。”巴利
Sappo vuccati ahīti yo koci saranto gacchati. Kenaṭṭhenāti kena atthena. Saṃsappanto gacchatīti yasmā sammā saṃsaranto gacchatīti sappo. Bhujantoti vaṅkavaṅko hutvā. Pannasiroti nipannasīso hutvā. Sirena supatīti sīsaṃ bhogantare katvā supanabhāvena sirasā supatīti sarīsapo. Bile sayatīti bilāsayo. ‘‘Bilasayo’’tipi pāḷi, taṃ sundaraṃ. Guhāyaṃ setīti guhāsayo. Dāṭhā tassa āvudhoti tassa sappassa duve dāṭhā paharaṇasatthasaṅkhāto āvudho. Visaṃ tassa ghoranti tassa sappassa byāpakasaṅkhātaṃ visaṃ dāruṇaṃ kakkhaḷaṃ. Jivhā tassa duvidhāti tassa sappassa dvedhā jivhā. Dvīhi jivhāhi rasaṃ sāyatīti duvidhāhi jivhāhi rasaṃ jānāti assādaṃ vindati sādiyatīti. Jīvituṃ kāmayatīti jīvitukāmo. Amarituṃ kāmayatīti amaritukāmo. Sukhaṃ kāmayatīti sukhakāmo. Dukkhappaṭikkūloti dukkhaṃ anicchamāno. Pādenāti attano pādena. Sappasiranti sappassa sīsaṃ. Vajjeyyāti dūrato vajjeyya. Vivajjeyyāti tassa pamāṇena. Parivajjeyyāti samantato. Abhinivajjeyyāti catutthappamāṇena. Atha vā purimena sīsato. Dutiyatatiyena dvīhi passehi. Catutthena pacchato. ‘‘Kāme pana appattassa pariyesanamūladukkhavatthubhāvena vajjeyya. Pattassa ārakkhamūladukkhavatthubhāvena vivajjeyya. Aññāṇapariḷāhadukkhavatthubhāvena parivajjeyya. Vināsamukhe piyavippayogadukkhavatthubhāvena abhinivajjeyyā’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
以染着的意义,叫做贪。以强烈染着的意义,叫做极染。因为一再地把众生引导到所缘境中,所以叫随顺;随顺就是认同、贪求的意思。在任何一种生命存在中,众生通过它而欢喜,或者它自身欢喜,所以叫喜。而喜又以染着的意义成为贪,所以合起来叫喜染。其中,对同一个所缘境只生起一次的渴爱,叫喜;反复多次生起的,叫喜染。所谓心的极染,是指前面说的以强烈染着的意义称为极染,但它不是众生的极染,而纯粹是心本身的极染,这就是它的含义。巴利
Rañjanavasena rāgo. Balavarañjanaṭṭhena sārāgo. Visaye sattānaṃ anu anu nayanato anunayo. Anurujjhatīti anurodho, kāmetīti attho. Yattha katthaci bhave sattā etāya nandantīti nandī, sayaṃ vā nandatīti nandī. Nandī ca sā rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo cāti nandirāgo. Tattha ekasmiṃ ārammaṇe sakiṃ uppannā taṇhā nandī, punappunaṃ uppajjamānā nandirāgoti vuccati. Cittassa sārāgoti yo heṭṭhā ‘‘balavarañjanaṭṭhena sārāgo’’ti vutto, so na sattassa, cittasseva sārāgoti attho.
众生用它来渴望各种所缘,所以叫“欲求”。因为烦恼深重,众生被它弄得昏头转向,所以叫“昏迷”。吞下去、彻底消化之后还牢牢抓住,这叫“联结”。众生由此变得贪婪,陷入贪著,所以叫“贪婪”;或者,从厚重的角度说,也叫“贪婪”,就像“林丛”是从厚重之义来说的一样。紧接着的词加上前缀来加强,就是“极贪婪”,意思是遍及一切的贪婪。众生被它粘住,所以叫“执著”;或者,从附着之义来说,也叫“执著”。从下沉之义来说,叫“泥沼”。从拉扯之义来说,叫“冲动”。正如经上说:“冲动拖着这个人,让他在各种生命形态中不断投生。”从欺骗之义来说,叫“幻术”。因为它在轮回中生出有情,所以叫“产生者”。正如经上说:“渴爱产生这个人,他的心四处奔驰。”它在轮回中让有情和苦绑在一起、不断产生,所以叫“遍生者”。从缝合之义来说,叫“缝针”。因为这种渴爱在轮回中,通过死亡和结生的方式,把有情缝起来、连起来,就像裁缝把碎布一块块缝在一起那样,所以说“从缝合之义,叫缝针”。它拥有种种样式的境网,或者说拥有叫作“渴爱挣扎”和“住着”的网,所以叫“有网者”。巴利
Icchanti etāya ārammaṇānīti icchā. Bahalakilesabhāvena mucchanti etāya pāṇinoti mucchā. Gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gahaṇavasena ajjhosānaṃ. Iminā sattā gijjhanti gedhaṃ āpajjantīti gedho. Bahalaṭṭhena vā gedho. ‘‘Gedhaṃ vā pana pavanasaṇḍa’’nti hi bahalaṭṭheneva vuttaṃ . Anantarapadaṃ upasaggavasena vaḍḍhitaṃ, sabbatobhāgena vā gedhoti paligedho. Sajjanti etenāti saṅgo. Lagganaṭṭhena vā saṅgo. Osīdanaṭṭhena paṅko. Ākaḍḍhanavasena ejā. ‘‘Ejā imaṃ purisaṃ parikaḍḍhati tassa tasseva bhavassa abhinibbattiyā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Vañcanaṭṭhena māyā. Vaṭṭasmiṃ sattānaṃ jananaṭṭhena janikā. ‘‘Taṇhā janeti purisaṃ, cittamassa vidhāvatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.55) hi vuttaṃ. Vaṭṭasmiṃ satte dukkhena saṃyojayamānā janetīti sañjananī. Ghaṭanaṭṭhena sibbinī. Ayañhi vaṭṭasmiṃ satte cutipaṭisandhivasena sibbati ghaṭeti tunnakāro viya pilotikāya pilotikaṃ, tasmā ‘‘ghaṭanaṭṭhena sibbinī’’ti vuttā. Anekappakāraṃ visayajālaṃ taṇhāvipphanditanivesasaṅkhātaṃ vā jālamassā atthīti jālinī.
以强力牵引为义,像急流一样迅速奔流,所以叫“河流”。或者以湿润为义,也叫“河流”。正如所说:“众生的河流湿润而滑腻,且令人喜悦。”这里的意思就是既湿润又滑腻。以导致不幸与毁灭为义,像系在龟上的线一样,所以叫“线”。正如所说:“比丘们,线是喜染的别名。”以遍及色等所缘为义,叫“散布”。为了获得种种所得,它驱使众生努力,所以叫“驱使努力者”。它不让众生在轮回中生起厌离,以始终相伴为义,所以叫“同伴”。因为它不让众生在轮回中生起厌离,无论走到哪里,都像可爱的朋友一样让他们感到快乐。因此说道:巴利
Ākaḍḍhanaṭṭhena sīghasotā saritā viyāti saritā. Allaṭṭhena vā saritā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘saritāni sinehitāni ca somanassāni bhavanti jantuno’’ti (dha. pa. 341). Allāni ceva siniddhāni cāti ayañhettha attho. Anayabyasanāpādanaṭṭhena kummānubandhasuttakaṃ viyāti suttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘suttanti kho, bhikkhave, nandirāgassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.159). Rūpādīsu vitthataṭṭhena visatā. Tassa tassa paṭilābhatthāya satte āyūhāpetīti āyūhinī. Ukkaṇṭhituṃ apadānato sahāyaṭṭhena dutiyā. Ayañhi sattānaṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ ukkaṇṭhituṃ na deti, gatagataṭṭhāne piyasahāyo viya abhiramāpeti. Teneva vuttaṃ –
以渴爱为伴侣的人,长久地流转于轮回之中,
不能超越这种状态与那种状态的轮回。巴利
‘‘Taṇhādutiyo puriso, dīghamaddhānasaṃsaraṃ; Itthabhāvaññathābhāvaṃ, saṃsāraṃ nātivattatī’’ti. (itivu. 15; a. ni. 4.9; mahāni. 191; cūḷani. pāyāyanānugītigāthāniddesa 107);
以发愿为根据,就叫作“愿”。被称为“有的引导者”,就是“有的绳索”。因为众生被这条绳索套住脖子,就像牛被绳子套住脖子一样,被牵向自己想要去的地方。它对这样那样的所缘向往、亲近、黏着,所以叫“林”;或者说,它向往、乞求,所以叫“林”。“林丛”这个词,是通过改变字母而加强的说法。又或者,因为它能生起无益和痛苦,有稠密之义,所以像丛林一样,叫“林”。这是强烈渴爱的名称。不过,由于有比它更稠密之义,比它更强的渴爱就叫“林丛”。因此说:巴利
Paṇidhānakavasena paṇidhi. Bhavanettīti bhavarajju. Etāya hi sattā rajjuyā gīvāyaṃ baddhā goṇā viya icchiticchitaṭṭhānaṃ niyyanti. Taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ vanati bhajati allīyatīti vanaṃ, vanati yācatīti vā vanaṃ. Vanathoti byañjanena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Anatthadukkhānaṃ vā samuṭṭhāpanaṭṭhena gahanaṭṭhena ca vanaṃ viyāti vanaṃ. Balavataṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Gahanataraṭṭhena pana tato balavatarā vanatho nāma. Tena vuttaṃ –
砍掉欲望的丛林,但不要砍树,因为恐惧正是从欲望的丛林里生出来的。
砍掉欲林和欲丛之后,比丘们,你们要成为寂灭者。巴利
‘‘Vanaṃ chindatha mā rukkhaṃ, vanato jāyate bhayaṃ; Chetvā vanañca vanathañca, nibbanā hotha bhikkhavo’’ti. (dha. pa. 283);
因交往而称为交往,意思是接触、结合。这种交往有两种:渴爱的交往和朋友的交往。这里指的是渴爱的交往。因爱著而称为爱著。因产生执著,心动摇而期待,所以称为期待。这也是经文中所说的:“天王,这八万四千座城市以拘舍婆提王都为首,在这里,天王,你应当生起欲望,对生命生起期待。”(《长部》2.266)这里的意思就是“产生执著”。它在每一种所缘上都系缚,所以称为系缚亲;或者依亲属之义,各各的亲属也称为系缚亲。也因恒常依附之义,对众生来说,没有比渴爱更亲的亲属了。因对诸所缘不满足,所以称为欲求。因为覆盖,以及随逐满足而受用,就是这个意思。因希求而称为希求。已希求的状态就是已希求性。巴利
Santhavanavasena santhavo, saṃsaggoti attho. So duvidho – taṇhāsanthavo mittasanthavo ca. Tesu idha taṇhāsanthavo adhippeto. Sinehavasena sneho. Ālayakaraṇavasena kampamānā apekkhatīti apekkhā. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘imāni te deva caturāsīti nagarasahassāni kusāvatīrājadhānippamukhāni, ettha deva chandaṃ janehi jīvite apekkhaṃ karohī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.266). Ālayaṃ karohīti ayañhettha attho. Pāṭiyekke pāṭiyekke ārammaṇe bandhatīti paṭibandhu, ñātakaṭṭhena vā pāṭiyekko bandhūtipi paṭibandhu. Niccasannissitaṭṭhenapi sattānaṃ taṇhāsamo bandhu nāma natthi. Ārammaṇānaṃ asanato āsā. Ajjhottharaṇato ceva tittiṃ anugantvāva paribhuñjanato cāti attho. Āsīsanavasena āsīsanā. Āsīsitassa bhāvo āsīsitattaṃ.
现在为了说明它生起的地方,就说了“色爱”等这些话。其中,以希求的方式去取“爱”的意思,对色的爱就是“色爱”。其余九项也应当这样理解。这里,前面五项是依五种欲乐来说的,第六项是依资具贪求来说的。这特别是对出家人说的。从那里往后的三项,是依不知足之事来说的,是对在家人说的。因为对他们来说,没有比财富、儿女和生命更可爱的东西了。心里想着“这是我的,这是我的”,或者想着“这是某某给我的,这是给我的”,就这样让人不停地念叨,所以叫“念叨”。后面两项因为加上了前缀而扩展了含义,再往后又开始用另一种方式来分析,所以又说了“念叨”。念叨的方式就是“念叨性”。已经念叨的状态就是“已念叨性”。一次又一次地在对象上抓取、拉扯,所以叫“贪求者”;贪求者的状态就是“贪求”。贪求的方式就是“贪求性”。具有贪求者的状态就是“已贪求性”。巴利
Idāni tassā pavattiṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpāsā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āsīsanavasena āsāti āsāya atthaṃ gahetvā rūpe āsā rūpāsā. Evaṃ navapi padāni veditabbāni. Ettha ca purimāni pañca pañcakāmaguṇavasena vuttāni, parikkhāralobhavasena chaṭṭhaṃ. Taṃ visesato pabbajitānaṃ, tato parāni tīṇi atittiyavatthuvasena gahaṭṭhānaṃ. Na hi tesaṃ dhanaputtajīvitehi aññaṃ piyataraṃ atthi. ‘‘Idaṃ mayhaṃ, idaṃ mayha’’nti vā ‘‘asukena me idaṃ dinnaṃ, idaṃ dinna’’nti vā evaṃ satte jappāpetīti jappā. Parato dve padāni upasaggena vaḍḍhitāni, tato paraṃ aññenākārena vibhajituṃ āraddhattā puna ‘‘jappā’’ti vuttaṃ. Jappanākāro jappanā. Jappitassa bhāvo jappitattaṃ. Punappunaṃ visaye lumpati ākaḍḍhatīti lolupo, lolupassa bhāvo loluppaṃ. Loluppanākāro loluppāyanā. Loluppasamaṅgino bhāvo loluppāyitattaṃ.
“摇尾乞求性”是指:众生被那种渴爱驱使,在能得到利益的地方摇着尾巴,像狗一样颤抖着到处游走,这就是对这种颤抖之渴爱的名称。对悦意或不悦意的境界生起欲求,所以叫“乐求者”,这种状态就是“乐求性”。对母亲、姨母等不正当对象生起的贪染,叫“非法贪”。即使在正当对象上,但生起时力量很强,这种贪也叫“不正当贪”。或者依据“贪是不正当的”等说法,无论在正当或不当对象上生起的欲贪,从不符合正法的意义上叫“非法贪”,从不平等、歪曲的意义上应理解为“不正当贪”。由于对种种对象生起喜好,叫“喜好”。喜好的方式叫“喜好行”。由于欲求,叫“欲求”。由于羡慕,叫“羡慕”。极力的欲求叫“妙欲求”。对五种欲功德的渴爱是“欲爱”。对色界、无色界存在的渴爱是“有爱”。对被称为断灭的非有的渴爱是“非有爱”。只对纯粹色界存在的渴爱是“色爱”。对无色界存在的渴爱是“无色爱”。与断灭见相应的贪染、对灭的渴爱是“灭爱”。对色的渴爱是“色爱”。对声的渴爱是“声爱”。对香、味等的渴爱也依此类推。至于“瀑流”等词,含义已如前说。巴利
Pucchañjikatāti yāya taṇhāya lābhaṭṭhānesu pucchaṃ cālayamānā sunakhā viya kampamānā vicaranti, taṃ tassā kampanataṇhāya nāmaṃ. Sādhu manāpamanāpe visaye kāmetīti sādhukāmo, tassa bhāvo sādhukamyatā. Mātāmātucchātiādike ayuttaṭṭhāne rāgoti adhammarāgo. Yuttaṭṭhānepi balavā hutvā uppanno lobho visamalobho. ‘‘Rāgo visama’’ntiādivacanato (vibha. 924) vā yuttaṭṭhāne vā ayuttaṭṭhāne vā uppanno chandarāgo adhammaṭṭhena adhammarāgo. Visamaṭṭhena visamalobhoti veditabbo. Ārammaṇānaṃ nikāmanavasena nikanti. Nikāmanākāro nikāmanā. Patthayanavasena patthanā. Pihāyanavasena pihanā. Suṭṭhu patthanā sampatthanā. Pañcasu kāmaguṇesu taṇhā kāmataṇhā. Rūpārūpabhavesu taṇhā bhavataṇhā. Ucchedasaṅkhāte vibhave taṇhā vibhavataṇhā. Suddhe rūpabhavasmiṃyeva taṇhā rūpataṇhā. Arūpabhave taṇhā arūpataṇhā. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo, nirodhe taṇhā nirodhataṇhā. Rūpe taṇhā rūpataṇhā. Sadde taṇhā saddataṇhā. Gandhataṇhādīsupi eseva nayo. Oghādayo vuttatthāva.
它会障碍善法,所以叫障碍。以覆盖的作用来说,叫覆盖。它把众生绑在轮回里,所以叫束缚。它伤害心,使心染污、变得不清净,所以叫随烦恼。由于它达到顽固有力的状态,一次又一次地随逐而眠,所以叫随眠。当它生起时,会遍覆、缠缚心,所以叫缠,意思是它剥夺了善法生起的机会。比如“盗贼缠住了路”“赌徒缠住了路”(《律藏·小品》430)这类说法里,意思就是霸占了路。同样地,这里也应当以执取的意义来理解缠。因为它有缠绕的特性,像藤蔓一样,所以叫藤蔓。“藤蔓生起后竖立着”(《法句经》340),在这里,这种渴爱也被称为藤蔓。因为它希求种种不同的事物,所以叫种种欲。它是轮回之苦的根本,所以叫苦根。它正是这苦的因由,所以叫苦因。这苦是从它产生的,所以叫苦的发生源。以束缚的意义来说,像套索一样,所以叫套索;是魔罗的套索,所以叫魔索。以难以吞下的意义来说,像钓钩一样,所以叫钓钩;是魔罗的钓钩,所以叫魔钩。被渴爱征服的人,无法超越魔罗的领域,魔罗在他们上面施展控制,以这个角度来说,就是魔罗的领域,所以叫魔境。以流动的意义来说,渴爱就像河流,所以叫渴爱河。以遍覆的意义来说,渴爱就像网,所以叫渴爱网。就像狗被系在猎狗绳上,只能随欲而行,同样,众生被渴爱系缚,所以以坚固束缚的意义来说,像猎狗绳一样,所以叫猎狗绳;渴爱就像猎狗绳,所以叫渴爱猎狗绳。以难以填满的意义来说,渴爱就像大海,所以叫渴爱海。以贪求的意义来说,叫贪求。众生因它而贪着,或者它自己贪着,或者它只是贪着的状态,所以叫贪。它作为相应诸不善法的立足处,所以叫根。巴利
Kusaladhamme āvaratīti āvaraṇaṃ. Chādanavasena chadanaṃ. Satte vaṭṭasmiṃ bandhatīti bandhanaṃ. Cittaṃ upahantvā kilissati saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ karotīti upakkileso. Thāmagataṭṭhena anu anu setīti anusayo. Uppajjamānaṃ cittaṃ pariyuṭṭhātīti pariyuṭṭhānaṃ, uppajjituṃ apadānena kusalavāraṃ gaṇhātīti attho. ‘‘Corā magge pariyuṭṭhiṃsu, dhuttā magge pariyuṭṭhiṃsū’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 430) hi maggaṃ gaṇhiṃsūti attho. Evamidhāpi gahaṇaṭṭhena pariyuṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Paliveṭhanaṭṭhena latā viyāti latā. ‘‘Latā uppajja tiṭṭhatī’’ti (dha. pa. 340) āgataṭṭhānepi ayaṃ taṇhā latāti vuttā. Vividhāni vatthūni icchatīti vevicchaṃ. Vaṭṭadukkhassa mūlanti dukkhamūlaṃ. Tasseva dukkhassa nidānanti dukkhanidānaṃ. Taṃ dukkhaṃ ito pabhavatīti dukkhappabhavo. Bandhanaṭṭhena pāso viyāti pāso, mārassa pāso mārapāso. Duruggilanaṭṭhena baḷisaṃ viyāti baḷisaṃ, mārassa baḷisaṃ mārabaḷisaṃ. Taṇhābhibhūtā mārassa visayaṃ nātikkamanti, tesaṃ upari māro vasaṃ vattetīti iminā pariyāyena mārassa visayoti māravisayo. Sandanaṭṭhena taṇhāva nadī taṇhānadī. Ajjhottharaṇaṭṭhena taṇhāva jālaṃ taṇhājālaṃ. Yathā sunakhā gaddūlabaddhā yadicchakaṃ niyyanti, evaṃ taṇhābaddhā sattāti daḷhabandhanaṭṭhena gaddūlaṃ viyāti gaddūlaṃ, taṇhāva gaddūlaṃ taṇhāgaddūlaṃ. Duppūraṇaṭṭhena taṇhāva samuddo taṇhāsamuddo. Abhijjhāyanaṭṭhena abhijjhā. Lubbhanti etena, sayaṃ vā lubbhati, lubbhanamattameva vā tanti lobho. Sampayuttakānaṃ akusalānaṃ patiṭṭhaṭṭhena mūlaṃ.
“Visattikā”就是“visattikā”。以什么含义呢?以什么性质呢?Visatā,就是散布在色等对象上。Visālā,就是广大。Visaṭā,就是依遍满三界而遍行。前面那个词只是把字母t变成ṭ,作了辅音变化之后说出来。Visakkatī,就是爬行,或者忍受。因为染着的人即使被贪染的对象用脚踢,也能忍受。退缩或挣扎,也叫做“visakkana”。有些人解释成“它是善与不善的主宰”。Visaṃharatī,就是它这样那样地看见诸欲中的好处,以种种方式把心从朝向出离的状态收摄回来、收缩起来;或者,visa是毒,也就是苦,它带走、运送那个苦,这就是它的含义。Visaṃvādikā,就是把无常等执取为常等,所以是欺诳者。因为它是产生苦的业之因,所以是毒根;或者,毒就是苦苦等受,以此为根,所以是毒根。因为它是苦的集起,所以其果为毒,即毒果。由于那种渴爱,对色等的受用只是苦的受用,而不是不死的受用,所以说为“毒受用”。在一切处,应当依词源学来了知词句的成立。巴利
Visattikātīti visattikā iti. Kenaṭṭhenāti kena sabhāvena. Visatāti vitthaṭā rūpādīsu. Visālāti vipulā. Visaṭāti tebhūmakabyāpakavasena visaṭā. Purimavacanameva takārassa ṭakāraṃ katvā byañjanavibhāgaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Visakkatīti parisappati sahati vā. Ratto hi rāgavatthunā pādena tāḷiyamānopi sahati. Osakkanaṃ vipphandanaṃ vā ‘‘visakkana’’ntipi vadanti. ‘‘Kusalākusalānaṃ patī’’ti keci vaṇṇayanti. Visaṃharatīti tathā tathā kāmesu ānisaṃsaṃ passantī vividhehi ākārehi nekkhammābhimukhappavattito cittaṃ saṃharati saṅkhipati, visaṃ vā dukkhaṃ, taṃ harati, vahatīti attho. Visaṃvādikāti aniccādiṃ niccādito gaṇhantī visaṃvādikā hoti. Dukkhanibbattakassa kammassa hetubhāvato visamūlā, visaṃ vā dukkhadukkhādibhūtā vedanā mūlaṃ etissāti visamūlā. Dukkhasamudayattā visaṃ phalaṃ etissāti visaphalā. Yāya taṇhāya rūpādikassa dukkhasseva paribhogo hoti, na amatassāti sā ‘‘visaparibhogā’’ti vuttā. Sabbattha niruttivasena padasiddhi veditabbā.
为了显示它的范围,才说“再者,那渴爱是广大的,在诸色中……”等。其中,“再者,广大”就是很大;以渴求的作用称为渴爱,这是就色等五种五欲功德的贪染而说的。“在家众”等十一个词,是依贪欲而说的。依欲界等三种分类,是依业轮转来划分;依欲有等三种分类,是依果报轮转来划分;依想有等三种分类,是依想来划分;依一蕴有等三种分类,是依蕴来划分。依过去等三种分类,是依时间来划分;依所见等四种分类,是依所缘来划分;依恶趣等三种分类,是依处所来划分;依蕴等三种分类,是依无有情、无命我来划分。应当如此了知。在这里,简要说明其含义并加以阐明:巴利
Tassā visayaṃ dassetukāmo ‘‘visālā vā pana sā taṇhā rūpe’’tiādimāha. Tattha visālā vā panāti mahantī eva taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā, rūpādayo pañca pañcakāmaguṇikarāgavasena vuttā. Kule gaṇetiādīni ekādasa padāni loluppādavasena vuttāni. Kāmadhātuttiko kammavaṭṭavasena vibhatto, kāmabhavattiko vipākavaṭṭavasena vibhatto, saññābhavattiko saññāvasena vibhatto, ekavokārabhavattiko khandhavasena vibhatto. Atītattiko kālavasena, diṭṭhacatukko ārammaṇavasena, apāyattiko okāsavasena, khandhattiko nissattanijjīvavasena vibhattoti ñātabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepena atthadīpanā vibhāvanā ca –
在这里,什么是欲界?从下面以无间地狱为界限,从上面以他化自在天为界限,在这中间范围内的、属于此处的、摄于此处的蕴、界、处,也就是色、受、想、行、识,这称为欲界。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā kāmadhātu? Heṭṭhato avīcinirayaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito paranimmitavasavattideve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā khandhadhātuāyatanā rūpaṃ vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati kāmadhātu’’ (dha. sa. 1287).
在这里,什么是色界?从下方以梵天界为边界,从上方把阿迦尼咤天包括在内,在这两者之间,属于此范围、摄于此处的,无论是已入定者的、已往生者的,还是现法乐住者的心与心所法,这称为色界。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā rūpadhātu? Heṭṭhato brahmalokaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito akaniṭṭhe deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa vā cittacetasikā dhammā, ayaṃ vuccati rūpadhātu’’ (dha. sa. 1289).
在这里,什么是无色界?下以空无边处天为界限,上以非想非非想处天为界限,在这中间,属于此范围、包含在此范围内的,无论是已入定者的、已投生者的,还是现法乐住者的心与心所法,这称为无色界。(《法集论》1291)不过,注释书中说:“欲界就是欲有,可得五蕴;色界就是色有,可得五蕴;无色界就是无色有,可得四蕴。”巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā arūpadhātu? Heṭṭhato ākāsānañcāyatanupage deve pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito nevasaññānāsaññāyatanupage deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa vā cittacetasikā dhammā, ayaṃ vuccati arūpadhātū’’ti (dha. sa. 1291). Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kāmadhātūti kāmabhavo, pañcakkhandhā labbhanti. Rūpadhātūti rūpabhavo, pañcakkhandhā labbhanti. Arūpadhātūti arūpabhavo, cattāro khandhā labbhantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
或者,与被称为欲贪的欲相应的界,就是欲界;或者,被称为欲的界,就是欲界。舍弃了欲,与色相应的界,就是色界;或者,被称为色的界,就是色界。舍弃了欲和色,与无色相应的界,就是无色界;或者,被称为无色的界,就是无色界。这些界又用“有”这个同义词来说。因为“存在”,所以称为“有”。与想相应的有,或者有想者的有,或者在这个有中有想,所以是想有。它既是欲有,也是除无想有之外的色有,也是除非想非非想有之外的无色有。巴利
Atha vā kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena yuttā dhātu kāmadhātu, kāmasaṅkhātā vā dhātu kāmadhātu. Kāmaṃ pahāya rūpena yuttā dhātu rūpadhātu, rūpasaṅkhātā vā dhātu rūpadhātu. Kāmañca rūpañca pahāya arūpena yuttā dhātu arūpadhātu, arūpasaṅkhātā vā dhātu arūpadhātu. Tā eva dhātuyo puna bhavapariyāyena vuttā. Bhavantīti hi bhavāti vuccanti. Saññāya yutto bhavo, saññāvataṃ vā bhavo, saññā vā ettha bhave atthīti saññābhavo. So kāmabhavo ca asaññābhavamutto rūpabhavo ca nevasaññānāsaññābhavamutto arūpabhavo ca hoti.
无想有不是想有,它属于色有的一部分。因为缺乏粗显性,所以不是有想;因为还有微细性存在,所以不是无想;因此叫非想非非想,与它相应的有就是非想非非想有。或者说,由于没有粗显的想而还有微细的想,所以在这种有中是非想非非想,这就是非想非非想有,它属于无色有的一部分。由一种色蕴构成的有,或者说这种有只有一种蕴,就叫一蕴有,它就是无想有。由四种无色蕴构成的有,或者说这种有有四种蕴,就叫四蕴有,它就是无色有。由五种蕴构成的有,或者说这种有有五种蕴,就叫五蕴有,它既是欲有,也是色有的一部分。过去等三分法,按照前面所说的方式理解。所见,是指由四种因产生的色所缘。所闻,是指由两种因产生的声所缘。所觉,是指通过接触而执取的、由四种因产生的香、味、触所缘。应知,是指应由意了知的法所缘。在这些所见、所闻、所觉、应知的法中,遍满、扩展,就是广大、散布。巴利
Na saññābhavo asaññābhavo, so rūpabhavekadeso. Oḷārikattābhāvato nevasaññā, sukhumattena sabbhāvato nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññā, tāya yutto bhavo nevasaññānāsaññābhavo. Atha vā oḷārikāya saññāya abhāvā sukhumāya ca bhāvā nevasaññānāsaññā asmiṃ bhaveti nevasaññānāsaññābhavo, so arūpabhavekadeso. Ekena rūpakkhandhena vokiṇṇo bhavo, eko vā vokāro, assa bhavassāti ekavokārabhavo, so asaññābhavova. Catūhi arūpakkhandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo, cattāro vā vokārā assa bhavassāti catuvokārabhavo, so arūpabhavo eva. Pañcahi khandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo, pañca vā vokārā assa bhavassāti pañcavokārabhavo, so kāmabhavo ca rūpabhavekadeso ca hoti. Atītattiko heṭṭhā vuttanayova. Diṭṭhanti catusamuṭṭhānikaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ. Sutanti dvisamuṭṭhānikaṃ saddārammaṇaṃ. Mutanti phusitvā gahetabbāni catusamuṭṭhānikāni gandharasaphoṭṭhabbārammaṇāni. Viññātabbaṃ nāma manasā jānitabbaṃ dhammārammaṇaṃ. Tesu diṭṭhasutamutaviññātabbesu dhammesu. Visaṭā vitthatāti mahantā patthaṭā.
所谓恶趣世间,是因为没有被称为“增长”的利益,所以叫恶趣(apāya),也就是在那个恶趣世间里。所谓蕴世间,是以积聚为含义,色等五蕴本身就是世间。所谓界世间,是以空为含义,眼界等十八界本身就是世间。所谓处世间,是以处等为因,十二处本身就是世间。一切也都有破坏、坏灭的含义,所以叫世间。在所说的这个世间中,遍满、扩展,所以叫渴爱(visattikā)。所谓“有念者”,因为能忆念,所以叫有念(sato),这是指具念之人的念。巴利
Apāyaloketi vaḍḍhisaṅkhātassa ayassa abhāvena apāyo, tasmiṃ apāyaloke. Khandhaloketi rāsaṭṭhena rūpādayo pañcakkhandhā eva loko. Dhātuloketi suññataṭṭhena cakkhudhātuādayo aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo eva loko. Āyatanaloketi āyatanādīhi kāraṇehi dvādasāyatanāni eva loko. Sabbepi lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko, vuttappakāre loke visaṭā vitthaṭāti visattikā. Satoti saratīti sato, puggalena sati vuttā.
在这里,念以忆念为特征。因为靠它忆念,或它自己忆念,或它只是忆念,所以叫念。这个念又以不漂浮为特征,以不忘失为作用,以守护为显现,或以面向所缘的状态为显现,以坚固的想为近因,或以身体等念处为近因。又因为它对所缘牢牢安立,所以应当看作像柱子一样;因为它守护眼门等处,所以应当看作像守门人一样。巴利
Tattha saraṇalakkhaṇā sati. Saranti tāya, sayaṃ vā sarati, saraṇamattameva vā esāti sati. Sā panesā apilāpanalakkhaṇā, asammosanarasā, ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā, visayābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā vā, thirasaññāpadaṭṭhānā, kāyādisatipaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānā vā. Ārammaṇe daḷhapatiṭṭhitattā pana esikā viya, cakkhudvārādīnaṃ rakkhaṇato dovāriko viya ca daṭṭhabbā.
为了说明它生起的地方,世尊用“在身体上修习身随观念处,具念……”等这样的方式,讲说了四种念处。其中,“在身体上”是指色身。这里,色身因为肢体、头发等诸法聚集在一起,就像象群、车群那样,所以被称为“身”。正如从聚集的意义上说是这样,从可厌之物所生之处这个意义上说也是这样。因为那些可厌、极其可憎的东西,它们生起的地方就是“身”。“生起之处”就是产生的地方。这里的词义是:从那里生起,所以叫“生起处”。什么从那里生起呢?就是可厌的头发等。因此,可厌的头发等的生起之处,就是“身”。巴利
Tassā pavattiṭṭhānaṃ dassento ‘‘kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvento sato’’tiādinā nayena catubbidhaṃ satipaṭṭhānamāha. Tattha kāyeti rūpakāye. Rūpakāyo hi idha aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca dhammānaṃ samūhaṭṭhena hatthikāyarathakāyādayo viya ‘‘kāyo’’ti adhippeto. Yathā ca samūhaṭṭhena, evaṃ kucchitānaṃ āyaṭṭhena. Kucchitānañhi paramajegucchānaṃ so āyotipi kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyantīti? Kucchitā kesādayo. Iti kucchitānaṃ kesādīnaṃ āyoti kāyo.
“身随观”就是对身的观察,或者说是观察身。已经先说了“于身”,后面又再一次说“身随观”,第二次提到“身”,应当知道这是为了显示:不混杂地加以确定,以及破除密集、作出区分等含义。巴利
Kāyānupassanāti kāyassa anupassanā, kāyaṃ vā anupassanā, ‘‘kāye’’ti ca vatvāpi puna ‘‘kāyānupassanā’’ti dutiyaṃ kāyaggahaṇaṃ asammissato vavatthānaghanavinibbhogādidassanatthaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ.
因此,这里不是在对身体修受随观或心随观、法随观,而纯粹是对身体修身随观。这样,在被称为“身”的这个所依对象上,只显示出身随观这一种行相,就表明了它是不混杂、能清楚区分的。同样地,也不是在身体中脱离各个肢体部分之后去修单一的法随观,也不是脱离头发、体毛等之后去观察女人或男人。即使这里所谓由头发、体毛等组成、由四大种及所造色聚合而成的身体,对它也不是脱离四大种及所造色之后去修单一的法随观,而是像观察车零件的人观察各肢体的聚合,像观察城市各部分的人观察头发、体毛等的聚合,像剥开芭蕉树干层层叶鞘的人,像拆开空拳的人那样,仅仅是对四大种及所造色的聚合进行观察。这样,以聚合的方式展示被称为“身”的这个对象的种种差别,就揭示了密集的分解。因为在这里,看不到有超出上述聚合之外的身体,也看不到女人、男人或其他任何法,众生只是在这些法的聚合之上,以各种方式生起颠倒执著。所以古代的大德们说:巴利
Tena na kāye vedanānupassanā cittadhammānupassanā vā, atha kho kāyānupassanāyevāti kāyasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ kāyānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti, tathā na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavinimuttaekadhammānupassanā, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassanā. Yopi cettha kesalomādiko bhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhāto kāyo, tatthāpi na bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassanā, atha kho rathasambhārānupassakassa viya aṅgapaccaṅgasamūhānupassanā, nagarāvayavānupassakassa viya kesalomādisamūhānupassanā, kadalikkhandhapattavaṭṭivinibhujanakassa viya rittamuṭṭhiviniveṭhakassa viya ca bhūtupādāyasamūhānupassanāyevāti samūhavaseneva kāyasaṅkhātassa vatthuno nānappakārato dassentena ghanavinibbhogo dassito hoti. Na hettha yathāvuttasamūhavinimutto kāyo vā itthī vā puriso vā añño vā koci dhammo dissati, yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatteyeva pana tathā tathā sattā micchābhinivesaṃ karonti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
他看见的,并不是那个所见;而那个所见,他却看不见。
愚人不见真相,所以被束缚;一旦被束缚,就解脱不了。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ passati na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passati; Apassaṃ bajjhate mūḷho, bajjhamāno na muccatī’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.106);
“为了显示坚实(ghana)、分离(vinibbhoga)等相”这句话是这样说的。这里“等”这个字还要理解到下面这层意思:在这个身体上,只有身随观,而不是对其他法的随观。譬如,即使是没有水的阳焰,也会生起“有水”的随观;但在这个本质是无常、苦、无我、不净的身体上,并不是生起常、乐、我、净的随观,而应当说,身随观就是对无常、苦、无我、不净这些行相之聚合的随观。巴利
Ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthanti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddena cettha ayampi attho veditabbo. Ayañhi etasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassanāyeva , na aññadhammānupassanā. Yathā anudakabhūtāyapi marīciyā udakānupassanā hoti, na evaṃ aniccadukkhānattāsubhabhūteyeva imasmiṃ kāye niccasukhattasubhabhāvānupassanā , atha kho kāyānupassanā aniccadukkhānattāsubhākārasamūhānupassanāyevāti vuttaṃ hoti.
或者,“于身随观身”也可以这样理解:在《大念处经》里,从“诸比丘,于此,比丘前往林野……”一直到“他具念地入息”等这样的方式,说到从入出息开始,直到碎成粉末的骨头为止,这整个身体;而在《无碍解道》讲念处的地方,也说到身体:“这里有人以无常随观地身,随观水身、火身、风身、发身、毛身、皮肤身、真皮身、肉身、血身、筋身、骨身、骨髓身。”对这一切都只是在这同一个身体上随观,所以称为“于身随观身”。也应该这样理解它的含义。巴利
Atha vā yvāyaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhāne ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā…pe… so satova assasatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.374; ma. ni. 1.107) nayena assāsapassāsādicuṇṇikajātaaṭṭhikapariyosāno kāyo vutto, yo ca paṭisambhidāyaṃ satipaṭṭhānakathāyaṃ ‘‘idhekacco pathavīkāyaṃ aniccato anupassati. Āpokāyaṃ. Tejokāyaṃ. Vāyokāyaṃ. Kesakāyaṃ. Lomakāyaṃ. Chavikāyaṃ. Cammakāyaṃ. Maṃsakāyaṃ. Ruhirakāyaṃ. Nhārukāyaṃ. Aṭṭhikāyaṃ. Aṭṭhimiñjakāya’’nti kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiṃyeva kāye anupassanato kāye kāyānupassanāti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
或者,从在身体中不执取“我”或“我的”这一角度来随观,以及从对头发、体毛等种种法聚随观的角度来看,应当这样理解其含义:于身体中,对被称为头发等聚合的身体作身随观。另外,依照《无碍解道》中依次而来的说法——“于此身中,以无常随观,而非以常随观”等等——对以无常相等行相聚合而成的身体进行随观,同样也是“于身修习身随观”,这个含义也应当这样理解。而这是四种念处共通的含义。巴利
Atha vā kāye ‘‘aha’’nti vā ‘‘mama’’nti vā evaṃ gahetabbassa yassa kassaci anupassanato tassa tasseva pana kesalomādikassa nānādhammasamūhassa anupassanato kāye kesādisamūhasaṅkhātakāyānupassanāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Api ca ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye aniccato anupassati, no niccato’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.35) anukkamena paṭisambhidāyaṃ āgatanayassa sabbasseva aniccalakkhaṇādino ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassa kāyassa anupassanatopi kāye kāyānupassanāti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo. Ayaṃ pana catusatipaṭṭhānasādhāraṇo attho.
“念处”这个词有三种含义:指念的所行境界,也指导师面对三类修行弟子时,已经超越了反感和贪著的状态,还指念本身。因为在“比丘们,我要为你们讲说四念处的集与灭……你们要好好听,好好作意……比丘们,什么是身的集?由食集而有身集”这类经文里,念的所行境界被称为“念处”。同样,在“身是建立处,不是念;念既是建立处,也是念”这类经文里也是这样。它的意思是:依之而建立,所以叫建立处。什么依之而建立?念。念的建立处,就是念处。或者说,精勤之处就是建立处,念的建立处就是念处,就像“象处”“马处”这样的命名方式一样。巴利
Satipaṭṭhānanti tayo satipaṭṭhānā satigocaropi, tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭighānunayavītivattatāpi, satipi. ‘‘Catunnaṃ, bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānānaṃ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca desissāmi, taṃ suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karotha…pe… ko ca, bhikkhave, kāyassa samudayo? Āhārasamudayā kāyasamudayo’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.408) hi satigocaro ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati . Tathā ‘‘kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ, no sati, sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati cā’’tiādīsupi (paṭi. ma. 3.35). Tassattho – patiṭṭhāti asminti paṭṭhānaṃ. Kā patiṭṭhāti? Sati. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, padhānaṭṭhānanti vā paṭṭhānaṃ, satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, hatthiṭṭhānaassaṭṭhānādīni viya.
“有三种念处,是圣者所依止的;圣者依止它而住时,堪为导师,能教导众人。”在这里,对于以三种方式行道的弟子们,导师心中已超越反感与贪著,这种状态被称为“念处”。它的含义是:应当建立起来的,所以叫“建立处”,也就是应当让它运转起来的意思。靠什么建立?靠念。念的建立处,就是“念处”。但在“四念处已修习、已多修习,能圆满七觉支”等经文中,念本身就被称为“念处”。它的含义是:安住,就是“建立处”,也就是进入、跃入、运转的意思。念本身就是建立处,所以叫“念处”。或者,以忆念之义为念,以安住之义为建立处。这样,既是念又是建立处,所以叫“念处”。这里所指的就是这个。那念处,令其增长,就是正在令其增长。在这里,对于以三种方式行道的弟子们,导师心中已超越反感与贪著,这种状态被称为“念处”,这应当由这部经来理解。因为世尊曾这样说:巴利
‘‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.304, 311) ettha tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭighānunayavītivattatā ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttā. Tassattho – paṭṭhapetabbato paṭṭhānaṃ, pavattayitabbatoti attho. Kena paṭṭhapetabboti? Satiyā, satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānanti. ‘‘Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrentī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.147) pana satiyeva ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Tassattho – patiṭṭhātīti paṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhāti okkantitvā pakkhanditvā pavattatīti attho. Satiyeva paṭṭhānanti satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Atha vā saraṇaṭṭhena sati, upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena paṭṭhānaṃ. Iti sati ca sā paṭṭhānañcātipi satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Idamidha adhippetaṃ. Taṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Bhāventoti vaḍḍhento. Ettha ca yaṃ tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭighānunayavītivattatā ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ iminā suttena gahetabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“有三种念处,是圣者所修习的;圣者修习它时,堪为导师,能教导众人。”这话确实被这样宣说过,那么,是依据什么而说的呢?比丘们,在这里,导师出于悲悯、为了弟子的利益,以悲悯心为弟子们说法:“这是为了你们的利益,这是为了你们的幸福。”但他的弟子们不肯听,不肯倾耳,不肯用心去了知,反而背离导师的教导行事。比丘们,在这种情况下,如来既不感到不满,也不领受不满,安住于无染污,具念正知。比丘们,这就是第一念处——圣者所修习,圣者修习它时,堪为导师,能教导众人。巴利
‘‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.304, 311) iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ, kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ. Idha, bhikkhave, satthā sāvakānaṃ dhammaṃ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṃ upādāya ‘‘idaṃ vo hitāya idaṃ vo sukhāyā’’ti. Tassa sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṃ odahanti, na aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthu sāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti , anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Yadariyo…pe… marahati.
再者,比丘们,导师……这是为了你们的幸福。他的有些弟子不肯认真听……并且背离导师的教法而行。有些弟子则认真听……并且不背离导师的教法而行。比丘们,在这种情况下,如来既不不满,也不感受到不满;既不满意,也不感受到满意。他舍弃不满与满意这两者,安住于舍,具念正知。比丘们,这称为第二。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, satthā…pe… idaṃ vo sukhāyāti. Tassa ekacce sāvakā na sussūsanti…pe… vattanti. Ekacce sāvakā sussūsanti…pe… na ca vokkamma satthu sāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, na ca attamano hoti, na ca attamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Anattamanatā ca attamanatā ca tadubhayaṃ abhinivajjetvā upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, dutiyaṃ…pe….
再者……这就是为了你们的幸福。他的弟子们认真听闻……并且依教奉行。比丘们,在这种情况下,如来心生欢喜,也感受到欢喜,并且安住在不受动摇之中,保持正念和正知。比丘们,这就叫做第三。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ…pe… idaṃ vo sukhāyāti. Tassa sāvakā sussūsanti…pe… vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato attamano ceva hoti, attamanatañca paṭisaṃvedeti, anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, tatiya’’nti (dī. ni. 3.311).
像这样,由于不被反感和喜爱所染污,并且因为正念恒常现起,超越了这两者,所以称为“念处”。据说,恒常现起的正念只有诸佛才有,独觉佛等人则没有。巴利
Evaṃ paṭighānunayehi anavassutatā niccaṃ upaṭṭhitasatitāya tadubhayaṃ vītivattatā ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttā. Buddhānameva kira niccaṃ upaṭṭhitasatitā hoti, na paccekabuddhādīnanti.
在“于受随观受”等说法中,之所以再次提到受等这些项目,其用意应当依照身随观里已经讲过的方式,按各自相应的情形套用后理解。这也是共通的含义。对于乐受等种种不同类别的受,要分别以无常等角度逐一随观每一种受。对于有贪等十六种不同类别的心,要分别以无常等角度逐一随观每一种心。除了身、受、心之外,对于其余三界中的诸法,要分别以无常等角度逐一随观每一种法,也就是按照《念处经》里所说的方式,随观盖等诸法。这里“身”用的是单数,因为身体是单一的;“心”用的是单数,因为心没有自性上的差别,应知这是以种类来总括而说的。再者,当一个人随观受等法应当被随观的样子时,他就被称为“于受随观受”“于心随观心”“于法随观法”,应当这样理解。那么,受应当如何随观呢?首先,乐受应当随观为苦,苦受应当随观为箭,不苦不乐受应当随观为无常。正如所说的:巴利
Vedanāsu vedanānupassanātiādīsu vedanādīnaṃ puna vacane payojanaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva yathāyogaṃ yojetvā veditabbaṃ. Ayampi sādhāraṇattho. Sukhādīsu anekappabhedāsu vedanāsu visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekavedanānupassanā. Sarāgādike soḷasappabhede citte visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekacittānupassanā. Kāyavedanācittāni ṭhapetvā sesatebhūmakadhammesu visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekadhammānupassanā satipaṭṭhānasuttante vuttanayena nīvaraṇādidhammānupassanāti. Ettha ca kāyeti ekavacanaṃ, sarīrassa ekattā . Citteti ekavacanaṃ, cittassa sabhāvabhedābhāvato jātiggahaṇena katanti veditabbaṃ. Yathā ca vedanādayo anupassitabbā, tathānupassanto vedanāsu vedanānupassanā, citte cittānupassanā, dhammesu dhammānupassanāti veditabbā. Kathaṃ vedanā anupassitabbā? Sukhā tāva vedanā dukkhato, dukkhā vedanā sallato, adukkhamasukhā aniccato anupassitabbā. Yathāha –
他把乐看成苦,把苦看成箭;
他看见那不苦不乐的寂静是无常的。
那位具备正见的比丘,确实遍知诸受。巴利
‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, addakkhi naṃ aniccato; Sa ve sammaddaso bhikkhu, parijānāti vedanā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 4.253);
所有这些心所,都应当作苦来观察。因为世尊说过:“凡是被感受的,我说它就是苦。”(相应部4.259)也应当作乐与苦来观察。正如经中所说:“乐受,持续时是乐,变坏时是苦;苦受,持续时是苦,变坏时是乐;不苦不乐受,有智慧时是乐,没有智慧时是苦。”(中部1.465)此外,还应当依无常等七种观法来观察。在心与法方面:心应当依所缘、增上、俱生、地、业、异熟、唯作等种种差别,以及无常等七种随观和有贪等十六种分类来观察;法应当依自相、共相、空性之法、无常等七种随观、寂静与非寂静等来观察。巴利
Sabbā eva cetā dukkhatopi anupassitabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ, taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259). Sukhadukkhatopi ca anupassitabbā. Yathāha ‘‘sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā, vipariṇāmadukkhā. Dukkhā vedanā ṭhitidukkhā, vipariṇāmasukhā. Adukkhamasukhā vedanā ñāṇasukhā, aññāṇadukkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465). Api ca aniccādisattavipassanāvasenāpi anupassitabbā. Cittadhammesupi cittaṃ tāva ārammaṇādhipatisahajātabhūmikammavipākakiriyādinānattabhedānaṃ aniccādisattānupassanānaṃ sarāgādisoḷasabhedānañca vasena anupassitabbaṃ. Dhammā salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇānaṃ suññatadhammassa aniccādisattānupassanānaṃ santāsantādīnañca vasena anupassitabbā.
这四种念处,在修行前期阶段,是在不同的心中生起的。因为,他是用这个心去把握身体,用另一个心去把握感受,用另一个心去把握心,用另一个心去把握诸法。但在出世间道的那个刹那,四念处只在一个心中同时生起。从一开始,先把握身体然后进入修行的人,与观相应的念就叫“身随观”,具备这个念的人就叫“身随观者”。精勤修观、证得圣道的人,在道刹那,与道相应的念就叫“身随观”,具备这个念的人就叫“身随观者”。巴利
Ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti. Aññeneva hi cittena kāyaṃ pariggaṇhāti, aññena vedanaṃ, aññena cittaṃ, aññena dhamme pariggaṇhāti, lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhantīti. Ādito hi kāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati kāyānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati kāyānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma.
先把握受、再把握心、再把握法之后而来的、与观相应的念,就叫“法随观”;具足这种念的人,就叫“法随观者”。精勤修观而证得圣道的人,在道刹那与道相应的念,就叫“法随观”;具足这种念的人,就叫“法随观者”。到此为止,开示是依人而安立的。不过,从身来说:为了断除“美”的颠倒,把握身的念由道而成就,所以叫“身随观”。从受来说:为了断除“乐”的颠倒,把握受的念由道而成就,所以叫“受随观”。从心来说:为了断除“常”的颠倒,把握心的念由道而成就,所以叫“心随观”。从法来说:为了断除“我”的颠倒,把握法的念由道而成就,所以叫“法随观”。这样,同一个与道相应的念,因为能完成四种作用,就得到四个名称。因此说:“在出世间圣道的刹那,只在一心中获得。”巴利
Vedanaṃ pariggaṇhitvā cittaṃ pariggaṇhitvā dhamme pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma, evaṃ tāva desanā puggale tiṭṭhati, kāye pana ‘‘subha’’nti vipallāsappahānā kāyapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti kāyānupassanā nāma. Vedanāya ‘‘sukha’’nti vipallāsappahānā vedanāpariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti vedanānupassanā nāma. Citte ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallāsappahānā cittapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti cittānupassanā nāma. Dhammesu ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāsappahānā dhammapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti dhammānupassanā nāma. Iti ekāva maggasampayuttā sati catukiccasādhakaṭṭhena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhantī’’ti.
另外,从饶益、不退失和功德这三个角度,又说了另外三组四法。其中,“以远离非念”:所谓“非念”,就是没有念,或者说这里不存在念,这是失念的另一种说法。“远离”就是彻底避开。就像避开停在饭上的乌鸦一样,通过避开失念的人、亲近具念的人,并且在行住坐卧等各种姿势中,为了让念生起,把心倾向、偏向、投向念,念就会生起。“于应作念之诸法”:就是应当以念去做的那些法。“由于已作”:意思是由于已经做了,也就是因为已修习了四道,已修习之义。因为已摧破念之障碍的诸法,即已灭除了贪欲等障碍该念的法。因念相诸法未忘失:因为作为念之原因的身等所缘未毁灭之故。巴利
Puna upakāravasena ca aparihīnavasena ca guṇavasena ca apare tayo catukkā vuttā. Tattha asatiparivajjanāyāti na sati asati, sati ettha natthīti vā asati, muṭṭhassatiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Parivajjanāyāti samantato vajjanena. Bhattanikkhittakākasadise hi muṭṭhasatipuggale parivajjanena upaṭṭhitasatipuggalasevanena ṭhānanisajjādīsu satisamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatāya ca sati uppajjati. Satikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānanti satiyā kātabbānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Katattāti katabhāvena. Catunnaṃ maggānaṃ katattā, bhāvitattāti attho. Satiparibandhānaṃ dhammānaṃ hatattāti kāmacchandādīnaṃ nāsitabhāvena. Satinimittānaṃ dhammānaṃ asammuṭṭhattāti satiyā kāraṇānaṃ kāyādiārammaṇānaṃ anaṭṭhabhāvena.
因为具足正念,是指以正念正确地具足、没有退失。因为自在,是指达到了自在的状态。因为熟练,是指娴熟的状态。因为不下退,是指不退转、不退缩的状态。巴利
Satiyāsamannāgatattāti satiyā sammā āgatattā aparihīnattā ca. Vasitattāti vasibhāvappattena. Pāguññatāyāti paguṇabhāvena. Apaccorohaṇatāyāti anivattanabhāvena apaccosakkanabhāvena.
“有实体”是指以自性而真实存在。“寂静”是指具有寂灭的自性。“止息”是指烦恼已被平息的状态。“具足寂静法”是指没有失去善士之法。佛随念等就按前面所说的方式理解。
“念”是就归依来说的,这是“念”的自性词。因为一再地忆念,所以从“随念”的角度叫随念。就像朝着面前走去那样去忆念,所以从“对念”的角度叫对念。或者只是加上前缀来扩展词形而已。
忆念的状态就是忆念性。然而,因为“忆念性”也是三种归依的共同名称,为了排除这一点,所以又再次举出“念”字。这里的意思就是:那被称为念的忆念性。
因为能把所听闻、所学习的东西保持住,所以叫持性。以进入、沉浸之义来说,不漂浮的状态就是无浮性。就像水里的葫芦等东西只会漂浮,不会沉进去,但念不是这样。念是会沉入所缘的,所以叫无浮性。因为对很久以前做过、很久以前说过的事不会忘失,所以叫无忘失性。
在现起相和照明相中起主宰作用,所以叫根;被称为念的根,就是念根。在放逸中不动摇,所以叫念力。如实地念、导向出离的念、善的念,所以叫正念。觉悟者的支分叫觉支;殊胜的、善的觉支叫正觉支;念本身就是正觉支,所以叫念觉支。巴利
Sattattāti sabhāvena vijjamānattā. Santattāti nibbutasabhāvattā. Samitattāti kilesānaṃ vūpasamitabhāvattā. Santadhammasamannāgatattāti sappurisadhammehi aparihīnattā. Buddhānussatiādayo heṭṭhā vuttanayā eva. Saraṇakavasena sati, idaṃ satiyā sabhāvapadaṃ. Punappunaṃ saraṇato anussaraṇavasena anussati. Abhimukhaṃ gantvā viya saraṇato paṭisaraṇavasena paṭissati. Upasaggavasena vā vaḍḍhitamattameva. Saraṇākāro saraṇatā. Yasmā pana saraṇatāti tiṇṇaṃ saraṇānampi nāmaṃ, tasmā taṃ paṭisedhetuṃ puna satiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Satisaṅkhātā saraṇatāti ayañhettha attho. Sutapariyattassa dhāraṇabhāvato dhāraṇatā. Anupavisanasaṅkhātena ogāhanaṭṭhena apilāpanabhāvo apilāpanatā. Yathā hi udake lābukaṭāhādīni palavanti, na anupavisanti, na tathā ārammaṇe sati. Ārammaṇañhi esā anupavisati, tasmā ‘‘apilāpanatā’’ti vuttā. Cirakatacirabhāsitānaṃ na sammussanabhāvato asammussanatā. Upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇe jotanalakkhaṇe ca indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, satisaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ satindriyaṃ. Pamāde na kampatīti satibalaṃ. Yāthāvasati niyyānasati kusalasatīti sammāsati. Bujjhanakassa aṅgoti bojjhaṅgo, pasaṭṭho sundaro vā bojjhaṅgo sambojjhaṅgo, satiyeva sambojjhaṅgo satisambojjhaṅgo.
“一乘道”就是唯一的道,应当这样理解:这条道不是分成两条的路。或者也可以说,因为只能由一个人去走,所以叫“一乘”。所谓“由一个人”,是指舍弃人群聚集,独自住在远离处,心也远离了杂染。应当去走、应当去修行;或者,因为经由它而行走,所以叫“乘”,意思是从轮回走向涅槃。一个人的乘,就是“一乘”。这里的“一个人”,是指最上者。一切众生中最上的就是世尊,所以说这是“世尊的乘”。虽然其他人也依它而行,但即便如此,这条乘仍然属于世尊,因为是由世尊开创的。正如经中说:“婆罗门,那位世尊是未生起之道的开创者……”等等。或者,“乘”是行走的意思,也就是前进、运转。它只在一种乘中运转,所以叫“一乘”;意思是说,它只在这个法和律中运转,不在别处。正如经中说:“须跋陀罗,只有在这个法和律中,才有八支圣道。”这只是说法方式的不同,意义上其实是同一个。再者,因为它走向唯一之处,所以叫“一乘”。在前一阶段,它虽然以种种不同方式的修习而运转,但到后一阶段,它只走向唯一的涅槃。正如梵天娑婆主所说:巴利
Ekāyanamaggoti ekamaggo, ayaṃ maggo na dvedhāpathabhūtoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā ekena ayitabboti ekāyano. Ekenāti gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya vūpakaṭṭhena pavivittacittena. Ayitabbo paṭipajjitabbo, ayanti vā etenāti ayano, saṃsārato nibbānaṃ gacchatīti attho . Ekassa ayano ekāyano. Ekassāti seṭṭhassa. Sabbasattānaṃ seṭṭhova bhagavā, tasmā ‘‘bhagavato’’ti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiñcāpi hi tena aññepi ayanti, evaṃ santepi bhagavatova so ayano tena uppāditattā. Yathāha ‘‘so hi brāhmaṇa bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 1.215; paṭi. ma. 3.5; ma. ni. 3.79). Ayatīti vā ayano, gacchati pavattatīti attho. Ekasmiṃ ayano ekāyano. Imasmiṃyeva dhammavinaye pavattati, na aññatthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘imasmiṃ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214). Desanābhedoyeva heso, atthato pana ekova. Api ca ekaṃ ayatīti ekāyano. Pubbabhāge nānāmukhabhāvanānayena pavattopi aparabhāge ekaṃ nibbānameva gacchatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha brahmā sahampati –
他怀有利益之心,亲见唯一的道路与生死的尽头,了知那条道路。
过去的人依靠这条道渡过了瀑流,未来的人也会渡过,现在正在渡的人同样在渡过。巴利
‘‘Ekāyanaṃ jātikhayantadassī, maggaṃ pajānāti hitānukampī; Etena maggena tariṃsu pubbe, tarissanti ye ca taranti ogha’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 5.384, 409);
被称为“道”,是从什么意义上说的呢?是从导向涅槃这个意义上,也是从寻求涅槃的人应当修行的道路这个意义上说的。“已近”是指已经到了附近。“极近”是指到了更近的地方。这两者都是指正念没有失去。“已到”是指到了之后安住下来。“极到”是指与之相应而安住。巴利文也有“已来到、极来到”这样的读法。这两者都是指已经来到正念附近。“已入”是指进入而不分离。“极入”是指圆满。“具足”是指毫无欠缺地存在。有些注释师这样解说:“‘已来到、极近’这两个词说的是生起;‘已到、极到’这两个词说的是通达;‘已入、极入、具足’这三个词说的是获得。”巴利
Maggoti kenaṭṭhena maggo? Nibbānaṃ gamanaṭṭhena, nibbānatthikehi magganīyaṭṭhena ca. Upetoti āsannaṃ gato. Samupetoti tato āsannataraṃ gato. Ubhayenapi satiyā aparihīnoti attho. Upagatoti upagantvā ṭhito. Samupagatoti sampayutto hutvā ṭhito. ‘‘Upāgato samupāgato’’tipi pāḷi. Ubhayenāpi satisamīpaṃ āgatoti attho. Upapannoti aviyogāpanno. Samupapannoti paripuṇṇo. Samannāgatoti avikalo vijjamāno. ‘‘Upeto samupetoti dvīhi padehi pavattaṃ kathitaṃ. Upagato samupagatoti dvīhi padehi paṭivedho. Upapanno samupapanno samannāgatoti tīhi padehi paṭilābho kathito’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
世间,那贪染:意思是,这以种种方式所说的贪染,只存在于五蕴世间,不会离开诸蕴而生起。或者,世间那贪染:就是指只存在于五蕴世间的、被称为贪染的渴爱。渡:避开诸欲而渡。超渡:断除烦恼而超渡。越渡:切断它们安住的因,因而越渡。超越:跨越轮回而超越。度越:使结生不再生起而度越。或者,以身随观而渡、超渡,以受随观而越渡,以心随观而超越。或者,以戒而渡,以定而超渡,以观而越渡,以道而超越,以果而度越。应当这样配合理解。巴利
Loke vā sā visattikāti yā esā anekappakārena vuttā visattikā, sā khandhaloke eva, na aññatra khandhehi pavattatīti attho. Loke vā taṃ visattikanti khandhaloke eva pavattaṃ etaṃ visattikasaṅkhātaṃ taṇhaṃ. Tarati kāme parivajjento. Uttarati kilese pajahanto. Patarati tesaṃ patiṭṭhāhetuṃ chindanto. Samatikkamati saṃsāraṃ atikkamanto. Vītivattati paṭisandhiabhabbuppattikaṃ karonto. Atha vā tarati uttarati kāyānupassanena. Patarati vedanānupassanena. Samatikkamati cittānupassanena. Atha vā tarati sīlena. Uttarati samādhinā. Patarati vipassanāya. Samatikkamati maggena. Vītivattati phalenāti evamādinā yojetabbaṃ.
4 第四偈的简要含义是这样:如果有人贪恋某一块稻田之类的田地,或者家宅之类的宅地,或者称为迦利沙槃的钱财,或者牛马之类分门别类的牛马,或者家生奴之类的奴婢,或者雇工之类的做工者,或者被称为女人的妇女们,或者亲戚、眷属之类的亲人,或者其他可爱色相之类的种种欲乐,那就是贪著不舍。稻田,就是稻谷生长的地方。麦田等也是同样的道理。麦,指其余各种谷物。令喜悦者,指绿豆。家宅,指为了建造房屋而整治过或还没整治的地块。仓库地基等也是同样的道理。仓库,指门房等。前,指屋前。后,指屋后。这里的园,因为能让心愉悦,所以叫园;意思是人们在这里享受花、果、树荫和水,所以称为园。巴利
4. Catutthagāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yo ekaṃ sālikhettādikhettaṃ vā gharavatthādivatthuṃ vā kahāpaṇasaṅkhātaṃ hiraññaṃ vā goassādibhedaṃ gavāssaṃ vā antojātādidāse vā bhatakādikammakare vā itthisaññitā thiyo vā ñātibandhavādibandhū vā aññe vā manāpiyarūpādike puthukāme anugijjhatīti. Sālikkhettanti yattha sāliyo viruhanti. Vīhikkhettādīsupi eseva nayo. Vīhīti avasesavīhayo. Modayatīti muggo. Gharavatthunti gharapatiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ katākatabhūmibhāgo. Koṭṭhakavatthādīsupi eseva nayo. Koṭṭhakoti dvārakoṭṭhādi. Pureti gharassa purato. Pacchāti gharassa pacchato. Ettha ārāmenti cittaṃ tosentīti ārāmo, pupphenapi phalenapi chāyāyapi dakenapi ramantīti attho.
畜生等,就是山羊等。家生的,就是出生在家里婢女肚子里的。财买的,就是用钱财买来、再转手取得的。自或,就是自己。奴性,就是奴仆的身份,那奴性。进入,就是进入。不乐,就是因为自己不情愿,或者作为战俘被带来。巴利
Pasukādayoti eḷakādayo. Antojātakoti antogharadāsiyā kucchimhi jāto. Dhanakkītakoti dhanena kīṇitvā parivattetvā gahito. Sāmaṃ vāti sayaṃ vā. Dāsabyanti dāsassa bhāvo dāsabyaṃ, taṃ dāsabyaṃ. Upetīti upagacchati. Akāmako vāti attano aruciyā vā karamarānīto.
为了再次说明这四种,他说:“也有一些人天生就是奴仆。”天生为奴,就是出生在家里婢女腹中的奴仆。像别处说的“有家生奴仆,做粗重的工作”,指的就是这一类。用钱财买来的,就是财买奴。自己甘愿为奴的,就是自愿奴。因恐惧而被驱使来的,就是不情愿的奴,因为害怕而被逼迫、被赶来的。巴利
Te cattāro punapi dassetuṃ ‘‘āmāya dāsāpi bhavanti heke’’ti āha. Āmāya dāsāti antojātadāsā. ‘‘Yattha dāso āmajāto ṭhito thullāni gacchatī’’ti etthāpi eteva vuttā. Dhanena kītāti dhanadāsā. Sāmañca eketi sayaṃ dāsā. Bhayāpaṇunnāti akāmadāsā. Bhayena paṇunnā khipitā.
靠工钱活命的人,就是佣工。做农耕等劳务的人,就是作务者。通过商量等方式去亲近、依靠别人而生活的人,就是依附者。巴利
Bhatakāti bhatiyā jīvanakā. Kasikammādikammaṃ karontīti kammakarā. Upajīvinoti sammantanādinā upagantvā nissayaṃ katvā jīvantīti upajīvino.
“妇女”:因为胎儿在她体内孕育,所以叫妇女。“摄受”:指有丈夫的女人,也就是同伴。“父母亲属”:指父母方面的血亲眷属。“同族”:指同族姓的亲属。“同一师门、或同一种姓、或同学咒术的”:指在同一老师门下、或同一种姓,或一起学咒术的人,这叫咒术亲属。“一起学弓箭等技艺的”:指一起学习弓箭等技艺的人,这叫技艺亲属。有些写本里也看到“朋友亲属等也是亲属”这样的读法。巴利
Itthīti thiyati etissaṃ gabbhoti itthī. Pariggahoti sahāyī sassāmikā. Mātāpitibandhavāpi ñātibandhu. Sagotto gottabandhu. Ekācariyakule vā ekajātimantaṃ vā uggahitamanto mantabandhu. Dhanusippādisaddhiṃ uggahitako sippabandhu. ‘‘Mittabandhavātipi bandhū’’ti katthaci potthake pāṭho dissati.
贪求:以烦恼欲而希求。随贪求:一再地贪求,一次又一次地希求。遍贪求:从四面八方去希求。极贪求:以特别的方式希求。有些注释者这样解释:因为以粗显的方式执取标记,所以是贪求、随贪求;因为以细部特征的方式执取,所以是遍贪求、极贪求。巴利
Gijjhatīti kilesakāmena pattheti. Anugijjhatīti anu anu gijjhati punappunaṃ pattheti. Paligijjhatīti samantato pattheti. Palibajjhatīti visesena pattheti. ‘‘Oḷārikattena nimittaggāhavasena gijjhati, anugijjhati, anubyañjanaggāhavasena paligijjhati, palibajjhatī’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
5 第五偈的简要含义是这样的:那个无力的人,被烦恼所压制、所征服、所摧垮。或者说,因为缺少信力等力量,那个无力的人就被无力的烦恼所压制——正因为自身没有力量,烦恼才显得强大。另一种说法是,那个贪求欲乐、染着于欲乐、四处追寻欲乐的人,会被狮子等明显的危险,以及身恶行等不明显的危险所摧垮。于是,被不明显的危险所制伏的那个人,生老病死等苦就会追随他,就像水涌入破船一样。巴利
5. Pañcamagāthāyaṃ ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – taṃ puggalaṃ abalakhyā kilesā balīyanti sahanti maddanti. Saddhābalādivirahena vā abalaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ abalā kilesā balīyanti, abalattā balīyantīti attho. Atha vā taṃ kāmagiddhaṃ kāmarattaṃ kāmapariyesantañca sīhādayo ca pākaṭaparissayā, kāyaduccaritādayo ca apākaṭaparissayā maddanti. Tato apākaṭaparissayehi abhibhūtaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ jātiādidukkhaṃ bhinnaṃ nāvaṃ udakaṃ viya anveti.
无力:这些没有力量,所以叫无力,也就是缺少力量。虚弱:因为懈怠、缺少力量,所以做不成该做的事。少力:它们的力量又少又小,所以叫少力,也就是没有能力去对抗。劣精进:它们的精进、努力又少又小,所以叫劣精进。卑下:因为努力卑下而卑下。劣等的:因为精进力低劣而劣等。低劣的:因为资具低劣而低劣。坏的:因为志向下劣而坏。小的:因为所得下劣而小。它们承受:就是压迫、制造撞击。它们遍受:就是从各方面压迫。它们制伏:以不断生起的方式制伏。它们覆压:以一再重复生起的方式覆压。它们耗尽:以令对方干枯而停住的方式耗尽。它们压碎:以阻碍善心生起的方式压碎。巴利
Abalāti natthi etesaṃ balanti abalā, balavirahitā. Dubbalāti mandapayogābalena kattabbakiccavirahitā . Appabalāti appaṃ parittaṃ etesaṃ balanti appabalā, yujjhituṃ asamatthā. Appathāmakāti appo paritto thāmo etesaṃ vāyāmo ussāhoti appathāmakā. Hīnā nihīnā payogahīnena. Omakā thāmahīnena. Lāmakā paccayahīnena. Chatukkā ajjhāsayahīnena. Parittā pattihīnena. Sahantīti maddanti ghaṭṭanaṃ uppādenti. Parisahantīti sabbato maddanti. Abhibhavanti aparāparaṃ uppattivasena. Ajjhottharanti punappunaṃ uppattivasena. Pariyādiyanti sussosetvā ṭhānena. Maddanti kusaluppattinivāraṇena.
信力:依靠它而相信,或者自己相信,或者它本身就是相信这件事,所以叫信。它以相信为特征,或者以认可为特征;它的作用是让心澄净,就像能让水澄清的宝珠一样;或者它的作用是跃入,就像渡过急流一样。它的表现是不浑浊,或者表现为内心已经决定倾向。它的直接原因是值得相信的事物,或者是入流支。应当把信看作像手、财富、种子一样。对不可信的事物不动摇,所以叫信力。
精进力:英雄的状态就是精进,或者诸英雄的行为就是精进,或者应当以方法、途径、善巧来策励、推动,所以叫精进。这个精进以支持为特征,也以策励为特征;它的作用是支持同时生起的心所;它的表现是不沉没的状态;依据“受到警策的人如理精勤”这句话,它的直接原因是警策感,或者说是应当精进努力的事。应当知道,正确发起的精进是一切成就的根本。面对懈怠而不动摇,所以叫精进力。念的特征等,前面已经说过了。巴利
Saddhābalanti saddahanti etāya, sayaṃ vā saddahati, saddahanamattameva vā esāti saddhā. Sā saddahanalakkhaṇā, okappanalakkhaṇā vā, sampasādanarasā udakappasādakamaṇi viya. Pakkhandanarasā vā oghuttaraṇo viya. Akālusiyapaccupaṭṭhānā, adhimuttipaccupaṭṭhānā vā. Saddheyyavatthupadaṭṭhānā, sotāpattiyaṅgapadaṭṭhānā vā. Sā hatthavittabījāni viya daṭṭhabbā. Asaddhiye na kampatīti saddhābalaṃ. Vīriyabalanti vīrassa bhāvo vīriyaṃ, vīrānaṃ vā kammaṃ vīriyaṃ, vidhinā vā nayena upāyena īrayitabbaṃ pavattayitabbanti vīriyaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ upatthambhanalakkhaṇañca paggahaṇalakkhaṇañca vīriyaṃ, sahajātānaṃ upatthambhanarasaṃ, asaṃsīdanabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘saṃviggo yoniso padahatī’’ti vacanato (a. ni. 4.113) saṃvegapadaṭṭhānaṃ, vīriyārambhavatthupadaṭṭhānaṃ vā. Sammā āraddhaṃ sabbasampattīnaṃ mūlanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kosajje na kampatīti vīriyabalaṃ. Satiyā lakkhaṇādīni vuttāneva.
在忘失正念时不动摇,这就是念力。能让同时生起的心所正确地专注、安住下来,这就是定。它的特相是带头主导,或者说不散乱;它的作用是把同时生起的诸法汇集到所缘上,就像水把洗澡用的粉末凝聚在一起;它的现起是寂静,或者以智慧为现起。因为经中确实说过:“入定的人能如实了知、如实看见。”特别要指出的是,它以快乐为落脚处,应当理解为心住立不动,就像无风处的灯焰一样稳定。在掉举时不动摇,这就是定力。能了知,这就是慧。了知什么呢?按照“这是苦”等等的方式来了知圣谛。它的特相是如实通达,或者说是无碍地通达,就像善射之人射出的箭一样精准贯穿;它的作用是照亮所缘,就像灯一样;它的现起是不迷惑,就像熟悉森林的人做向导一样。在无明面前不动摇,这就是慧力。于无惭之人面前不动摇,这就是惭力。于无愧之人面前不动摇,这就是愧力。以上是从两个角度作的解释。因为身恶行等而感到羞耻,这就是惭,这是羞耻的同义词。正因为那些恶行而感到恐惧,这就是愧,这是对罪恶感到害怕的同义词。巴利
Muṭṭhassacce na kampatīti satibalaṃ. Sahajātāni sammā ādhīyati ṭhapetīti samādhi. So pāmokkhalakkhaṇo avikkhepalakkhaṇo vā, sahajātānaṃ dhammānaṃ ārammaṇe sampiṇḍanaraso nhāniyacuṇṇānaṃ udakaṃ viya, upasamapaccupaṭṭhāno, ñāṇapaccupaṭṭhāno vā. ‘‘Samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti passatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Visesato sukhapadaṭṭhāno nivāte padīpaccīnaṃ ṭhiti viya cetaso ṭhitīti daṭṭhabbo. Uddhacce na kampatīti samādhibalaṃ. Pajānātīti paññā. Kiṃ pajānāti? ‘‘Idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 15) nayena ariyasaccāni. Sā yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā, akkhalitapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā vā kusalissāsakhittausupaṭivedho viya, visayobhāsanarasā padīpo viya, asammohapaccupaṭṭhānā araññagatasudesako viya. Avijjāya na kampatīti paññābalaṃ. Hiribalaṃ ottappabalanti ahirike na kampatīti hiribalaṃ. Anottappe na kampatīti ottappabalaṃ. Ayaṃ ubhayavasena atthavaṇṇanā hoti. Kāyaduccaritādīhi hirīyatīti hirī, lajjāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tehi eva ottappatīti ottappaṃ, pāpato ubbegassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
为了说明它们之间的差别,先立下“等起、增上主、以羞耻等为相”这个论母,然后展开详细解说:从自身内部生起的,叫惭;从外部引发的,叫愧。以自己为增上主的,叫惭;以世间为增上主的,叫愧。安住在羞耻本性中的,叫惭;安住在怖畏本性中的,叫愧。以尊重为特相的,叫惭;以畏惧过失、见到怖畏为特相的,叫愧。巴利
Tesaṃ nānākaraṇadīpanatthaṃ – ‘‘samuṭṭhānaṃ adhipati, lajjādilakkhaṇena cā’’ti imaṃ mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā ayaṃ vitthārakathā vuttā – ajjhattasamuṭṭhānā hirī nāma, bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ ottappaṃ nāma. Attādhipati hirī nāma, lokādhipati ottappaṃ nāma. Lajjāsabhāvasaṇṭhitā hirī nāma, bhayasabhāvasaṇṭhitaṃ ottappaṃ nāma. Sappatissavalakkhaṇā hirī nāma, vajjabhīrukabhayadassāvilakkhaṇaṃ ottappaṃ nāma.
在这里,由内在生起的惭通过四种原因被激发出来:省察自己的出身、省察自己的年龄、省察自己的勇气、省察自己的博学。怎样激发呢?他这样省察出身:“造作恶业,不是出身高贵的人该做的事,这是出身低贱的人,比如渔夫之类才做的事;像我这样出身高贵的人,做这种事是不合适的。”于是不造杀生等恶行,惭就被激发出来了。同样,他省察年龄:“造作恶业,是年轻人该做的事;像我这样已经上了年纪的人,做这种事是不合适的。”于是不造杀生等恶行,惭就被激发出来了。同样,他省察勇气:“造作恶业,是软弱胆小的人做的事;像我这样具足勇气的人,做这种事是不合适的。”于是不造杀生等恶行,惭就被激发出来了。同样,他省察博学:“造作恶业,是愚痴无知的人做的事,不是智者做的事。像我这样有智慧、博学多闻的人,做这种事是不合适的。”于是不造杀生等恶行,惭就被激发出来了。就这样,由内在生起的惭通过四种原因被激发出来。激发出来之后,把惭安立在自己心中,便不造恶业。这就叫作由内在生起的惭。那么,什么叫由外在生起的愧呢?如果你造作恶业,就会在四种大众中被指责——巴利
Tattha ajjhattasamuṭṭhānaṃ hiriṃ catūhi kāraṇehi samuṭṭhāpeti – jātiṃ paccavekkhitvā, vayaṃ paccavekkhitvā, sūrabhāvaṃ paccavekkhitvā, bāhusaccaṃ paccavekkhitvā. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Pāpakaraṇaṃ nāmetaṃ na jātisampannānaṃ kammaṃ, hīnajaccānaṃ kevaṭṭādīnaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ, mādisassa jātisampannassa idaṃ kammaṃ kātuṃ na yutta’’nti evaṃ tāva jātiṃ paccavekkhitvā pāṇātipātādipāpaṃ akaronto hiriṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Tathā ‘‘pāpakaraṇaṃ nāmetaṃ daharehi kattabbaṃ kammaṃ, mādisassa vaye ṭhitassa idaṃ kammaṃ kātuṃ na yutta’’nti evaṃ vayaṃ paccavekkhitvā pāṇātipātādipāpaṃ akaronto hiriṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Tathā ‘‘pāpakammaṃ nāmetaṃ dubbalajātikānaṃ kammaṃ, mādisassa sūrabhāvasampannassa idaṃ kammaṃ kātuṃ na yutta’’nti evaṃ sūrabhāvaṃ paccavekkhitvā pāṇātipātādipāpaṃ akaronto hiriṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Tathā ‘‘pāpakammaṃ nāmetaṃ andhabālānaṃ kammaṃ, na paṇḍitānaṃ. Mādisassa paṇḍitassa bahussutassa idaṃ kammaṃ kātuṃ na yutta’’nti evaṃ bāhusaccaṃ paccavekkhitvā pāṇātipātādipāpaṃ akaronto hiriṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Evaṃ ajjhattasamuṭṭhānaṃ hiriṃ catūhi kāraṇehi samuṭṭhāpeti. Samuṭṭhāpetvā ca pana attano citte hiriṃ pavesetvā pāpakammaṃ na karoti. Evaṃ ajjhattasamuṭṭhānā hirī nāma hoti. Kathaṃ bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ ottappaṃ nāma? ‘‘Sace tvaṃ pāpakammaṃ karissasi, catūsu parisāsu garahappatto bhavissasi –
智者将呵责你,犹如城中人呵责不净之物。
你已经被持戒的人嫌弃了,比丘,你打算怎么办?巴利
‘‘Garahissanti taṃ viññū, asuciṃ nāgariko yathā; Vajjito sīlavantehi, kathaṃ bhikkhu karissasī’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1 kāmāvacarakusala dhammuddesakathā) –
像这样反复审察的人,因为从外部生起的愧,就不去造作恶业。这样从外部生起的,就叫作愧。巴利
Evaṃ paccavekkhanto hi bahiddhāsamuṭṭhitena ottappena pāpakammaṃ na karoti, evaṃ bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ ottappaṃ nāma hoti.
什么是“以自己为增上主的惭”?这里,有一位良家子把自己当作增上主、当作尊长,心想:“像我这样因信心而出家、多闻、持守头陀支的人,去做恶业是不合适的。”于是他不作恶。这样就叫作“以自己为增上主的惭”。因此世尊说:“他把自己当作增上主,舍弃不善,修习善法;舍弃有过失的,修习无过失的;保持自身清净。”巴利
Kathaṃ attādhipati hirī nāma? Idhekacco kulaputto attānaṃ adhipatiṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā ‘‘mādisassa saddhāpabbajitassa bahussutassa dhutaṅgadharassa na yuttaṃ pāpakammaṃ kātu’’nti pāpaṃ na karoti. Evaṃ attādhipati hirī nāma hoti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘so attānaṃyeva adhipatiṃ karitvā akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāveti, sāvajjaṃ pajahati, anavajjaṃ bhāveti, suddhaṃ attānaṃ pariharatī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1 kāmāvacarakusala dhammuddesakathā; a. ni. 3.40).
什么是“以世间为增上主的愧”?在这里,有一位良家子把世间当作增上主、当作尊长,因此不去造恶业。正如经中所说:巴利
Kathaṃ lokādhipati ottappaṃ nāma? Idhekacco kulaputto lokaṃ adhipatiṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pāpakammaṃ na karoti. Yathāha –
这个世间的人群实在很大。在这样广大的人群当中,有些沙门、婆罗门有神通、有天眼、能知道别人的心。他们远处也能看见,近处也藏不住,还能用心知道别人的心。他们也会这样知道我:“看哪,这位善男子因为信心,从在家出家,却跟种种恶不善法混在一起住。”还有些天神也有神通、有天眼、能知道别人的心。她们远处也能看见,近处也藏不住,还能用心知道别人的心。她们也会这样知道我:“看哪,这位善男子因为信心,从在家出家,却跟种种恶不善法混在一起住。”他这样思量:“我要发起精进,不退懈;念要现前,不忘失;身体要轻安,不躁动;心要得定,专一。”他就以世间为最高准则,舍弃不善,修习善法;舍弃有过失的,修习没有过失的;保持自己清净。巴利
‘‘Mahā kho panāyaṃ lokasannivāso, mahantasmiṃ kho pana lokasannivāse santi samaṇabrāhmaṇā iddhimanto dibbacakkhukā paracittaviduno, te dūratopi passanti, āsannāpi na dissanti, cetasāpi cittaṃ jānanti. Tepi maṃ evaṃ jāneyyuṃ ‘passatha bho imaṃ kulaputtaṃ saddhāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajito samāno vokiṇṇo viharati pāpakehi akusalehi dhammehī’ti. Devatāpi kho santi iddhimantiniyo dibbacakkhukā paracittaviduniyo, tā dūratopi passanti, āsannāpi na dissanti, cetasāpi cittaṃ jānanti. Tāpi maṃ evaṃ jāneyyuṃ ‘passatha bho imaṃ kulaputtaṃ saddhāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajito samāno vokiṇṇo viharati pāpakehi akusalehi dhammehī’ti. So iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘āraddhaṃ kho pana me vīriyaṃ bhavissati asallīnaṃ, upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, passaddho kāyo asāraddho, samāhitaṃ cittaṃ ekagga’nti. So lokaṃyeva adhipatiṃ karitvā akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāveti, sāvajjaṃ pajahati, anavajjaṃ bhāveti, suddhaṃ attānaṃ pariharatī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1 kāmāvacarakusala dhammuddesakathā; a. ni. 3.40).
这样,以世间为最高准则时,就叫做愧。不过在这里,“惭以羞耻为本质而安住,愧以畏惧为本质而安住”这句话中,“羞耻”是指感到羞耻的那种状态,以这种本质而安住的,就是惭;“畏惧”是指对恶趣的恐惧,以这种本质而安住的,就是愧。这两者在避免恶行时都会清楚地显现出来。比如,有一位良家子,在大小便等地方,看到一个让自己应当感到羞耻的对象,就会像被责骂了一样,生起羞耻的状态;同样地,有的人内心进入惭的状态,就不去造恶。也有的人是因为害怕堕入恶趣,所以不造恶。巴利
Evaṃ lokādhipati ottappaṃ nāma hoti. ‘‘Lajjāsabhāvasaṇṭhitā hirī, bhayasabhāvasaṇṭhitaṃ ottappa’’nti ettha pana lajjāti lajjanākāro, tena sabhāvena saṇṭhitā hirī. Bhayanti apāyabhayaṃ, tena sabhāvena saṇṭhitaṃ ottappaṃ. Tadubhayampi pāpaparivajjane pākaṭaṃ hoti. Ekacco hi yathā nāma eko kulaputto uccārapassāvādīni karonto lajjitabbayuttakaṃ ekaṃ disvā lajjanākārappatto bhaveyya hīḷito, evameva ajjhattaṃ lajjīdhammaṃ okkamitvā pāpakammaṃ na karoti. Ekacco apāyabhayabhīto hutvā pāpakammaṃ na karoti.
这里的譬喻是这样的:比如有两个铁球,一个又冷又涂满粪便,另一个又热又烧得通红。有智慧的人因为厌恶那个冷铁球涂了粪便,所以不去拿它;对另一个,则因为怕被烫伤,也不去拿。这里应当这样理解:因为厌恶冷铁球涂了粪便而不去拿,就像内心生起惭耻之心而不作恶;因为害怕炽热铁球烫伤而不去拿,就像因为害怕恶趣而不作恶。巴利
Tatridaṃ opammaṃ – yathā hi dvīsu ayoguḷesu eko sītalo bhaveyya gūthamakkhito, eko uṇho āditto. Tattha paṇḍito sītalaṃ gūthamakkhitattā jigucchanto na gaṇhāti, itaraṃ ḍāhabhayena. Tattha sītalassa gūthamakkhanajigucchāya agaṇhanaṃ viya ajjhattaṃ lajjīdhammaṃ okkamitvā pāpassa akaraṇaṃ, uṇhassa ḍāhabhayena agaṇhanaṃ viya apāyabhayena pāpassa akaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
惭的特相是带有恭敬与羞耻,愧的特相是害怕过失、见到危险而畏惧。这两者,也只有在避开恶行时才会清楚地显现出来。有些人通过四种原因——省察出身的高贵、省察导师的高贵、省察传承的高贵、省察同梵行者的高贵——生起具有恭敬与羞耻特相的惭,因此不去作恶。有些人通过四种方式——害怕自我谴责、害怕他人谴责、害怕刑罚、害怕恶趣——生起具有害怕过失、见到危险而畏惧特相的愧,因此不去作恶。其中,省察出身高贵等四种原因,以及害怕自我谴责等四种方式,应当展开详细说明。像这样所说的七种力,如果某个人没有,那些烦恼就会压制这个人……乃至……完全制服、摧破他。巴利
‘‘Sappatissavalakkhaṇā hirī, vajjabhīrukabhayadassāvilakkhaṇaṃ ottappa’’nti idampi dvayaṃ pāpaparivajjane eva pākaṭaṃ hoti. Ekacco hi jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇā satthumahattapaccavekkhaṇā dāyajjamahattapaccavekkhaṇā sabrahmacārimahattapaccavekkhaṇāti catūhi kāraṇehi sappatissavalakkhaṇaṃ hiriṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā pāpaṃ na karoti. Ekacco attānuvādabhayaṃ parānuvādabhayaṃ daṇḍabhayaṃ duggatibhayanti catūhākārehi vajjabhīrukabhāvadassāvilakkhaṇaṃ ottappaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā pāpaṃ na karoti. Tattha jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇādīni ceva attānuvādabhayādīni ca vitthāretvā kathetabbāni. Evaṃ vuttaṃ sattavidhaṃ balaṃ yassa puggalassa natthi, te kilesā taṃ puggalaṃ sahanti…pe… pariyādiyanti maddantīti.
有两种灾祸:按明显和不明显来分,灾祸就只有两种,不是一种,也不是三种。为了把它们分别说明,经文接着说“哪些是明显的灾祸”等等。其中,“狼”就是野狼,这也是一种读法。“贼”指做偷盗之事的人。“恶少年”指做暴力之事的人。“已作案”指已经做了破墙入室等偷盗行为。“未作案”指正要去做那种事的人。这里“应有”就是“会有”的意思。“眼病”:在眼睛里生起的病,会痛,所以叫病。“耳病”:外耳的疾病。“口病”:口中生起的疾病。“牙病”:牙痛。“咳嗽”:肺痨病。“喘息”:喘气、呕逆之病。“鼻塞”:外鼻的疾病。“内热”:身体内部生起的热。“昏厥”:令人失去记忆的。“下血”:血性下痢、严重腹泻。“绞痛”:腹内绞痛、腹中风。“霍乱”:严重的泻下。“麻风”:疥癣。“干瘦”:干枯的消瘦病。“癫痫”:非人附体、怨鬼所扰。“癣”:癣疮。“痒”:小疮。“疥”:大疥疮。“抓伤”:用指甲抓破处所生的病。也作“nakhasā”的巴利语。“裂疮”:在手掌足底裂开成一道道而生的病。“血胆”:就是血液之胆,说的是赤胆。“糖尿病”:身体内部严重的疾病。这确实说过:“又,糖尿病是严重的疾病。”巴利
Dve parissayāti pākaṭāpākaṭavasena dve eva upaddavā, na ekaṃ, na tīṇi. Te vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘katame pākaṭaparissayā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kokāti kekā. Ayameva vā pāṭho. Corāti coriyakammehi yuttā. Māṇavāti sāhasikakammehi yuttā. Katakammāti sandhicchedādikatacorikakammā. Akatakammāti taṃ kammaṃ kātuṃ nikkhantā. Ettha assūti bhaveyyunti attho. Cakkhurogoti cakkhusmiṃ uppannarogo, rujatīti rogo. Cakkhurogotiādayo vatthuvasena veditabbā. Nibbattitapasādānañhi rogo nāma natthi. Kaṇṇarogoti bahikaṇṇarogo. Mukharogoti mukhe uppannarogo. Dantarogoti dantasūlaṃ. Kāsoti khayarogo. Sāsoti svāso uggārarogo. Pināsoti bahināsikāya rogo. Ḍāhoti abbhantare uppajjanako uṇho. Mucchāti sativissajjanakā. Pakkhandikāti lohitapakkhandikā atisāro. Sūlāti āmasūlā kucchivāto. Visūcikāti mahanto virecanako. Kilāsoti sabalo. Sosoti sukkhanako sosabyādhi. Apamāroti amanussaggāho veriyakkhābādho. Daddūti daddupīḷakā. Kaṇḍūti khuddakapīḷakā. Kacchūti mahākacchu. Rakhasāti nakhehi vilikhitaṭṭhāne rogo. ‘‘Nakhasā’’tipi pāḷi. Vitacchikāti hatthatalapādatalesu hīraṃ hīraṃ katvā phālento uppajjanakarogo. Lohitapittanti soṇitapittaṃ, rattapittanti vuttaṃ hoti. Madhumehoti sarīrabbhantare ukkaṭṭharogo. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘api ca madhumeho ābādho ukkaṭṭho’’ti (pāci. 15).
“痔疮”就是痔漏病。“肿疱”就是血疱。“裂肛”是指肛门裂开,意思是排便的通道裂开。“胆汁所生”是指这些病的生起原因来自胆汁,由胆汁产生。据说有三十二种。痰所生等也是同样的道理。“和合生”是指由风、胆汁、痰三者聚合为一体而产生的病。因为具有病痛的意义,所以叫病。“由时节变异所生”是指由季节变化而产生的病。“极寒等所生”是指由寒冷等引起的病。“由非平衡生活所生”是指由不正确的站立、坐卧等不平衡的生活方式而产生的病。“加害所生”是指由砍杀、捆绑等加害行为所引起的病。“业报所生”是指由强烈的业报所产生的病。冷、热……省略……所触,这些都是显而易见的。“或者这些等”就是这样。“这些被称为”是总结的说法。巴利
Aṃsāti arisarogo. Pīḷakāti lohitapīḷakā. Bhagaṃ dālayatīti bhagandalā, vaccamaggaṃ phāletīti attho. Pittasamuṭṭhānāti pittena samuṭṭhānaṃ uppatti etesanti pittasamuṭṭhānā. Te kira dvattiṃsa honti. Semhasamuṭṭhānādīsupi eseva nayo. Sannipātikāti vātapittasemhānaṃ sannipātena ekībhāvena uppannā. Ābādhaṭṭhena ābādhā. Utupariṇāmajāti utupariṇāmena. Accuṇhāti sītena uppajjanakarogā. Visamaparihārajāti atiṭṭhānanisajjādinā visamaparihārena jātā. Opakkamikāti vadhabandhanādinā upakkamena jātā. Kammavipākajāti balavakammavipākasambhūtā. Sītaṃ uṇhaṃ…pe… samphassoti ime pākaṭā eva. Iti vāti evaṃ vā. Ime vuccantīti nigamento āha.
“哪些是隐藏的灾祸?”这是在问:那些不明显的、被遮盖的灾祸是什么?其中,身恶行应当理解为杀生、不与取、邪淫的思。语恶行应当理解为妄语、两舌、粗恶语、绮语的思。意恶行应当理解为贪欲、嗔害、邪见。因为是发生在身体上,或者从身体产生,是恶劣的行为,又因为被烦恼染污而腐臭,所以叫身恶行。语恶行和意恶行也是同样的道理。巴利
Katame paṭicchannaparissayāti apākaṭā acchāditaupaddavā katameti pucchati. Tattha kāyaduccaritanti pāṇātipātaadinnādānamicchācāracetanā veditabbā. Vacīduccaritanti musāvādapisuṇavācāpharusavācāsamphappalāpacetanā veditabbā. Manoduccaritanti abhijjhābyāpādamicchādiṭṭhiyo veditabbā. Kāye pavattaṃ, kāyato vā pavattaṃ, duṭṭhu caritaṃ, kilesapūtikattā vā duṭṭhu caritanti kāyaduccaritaṃ. Vacīmanoduccaritesupi eseva nayo.
欲被称为“欲”,是因为人们贪求它们,也就是五种欲乐。对诸欲的贪求,就是欲贪。或者,贪求本身就是“欲”,欲就是贪求,这就是欲贪,不是想做事的欲求,也不是对法的欲求。欲爱就是这种名称。它覆盖善法,所以叫盖;欲贪本身就是盖,就是欲贪盖。其余诸盖也是这样。通过它,心变得腐坏;或者它破坏戒行、威仪、色身、成就、利益和安乐等,所以叫嗔恚。昏沉是沉滞的状态。睡眠是昏睡的状态,也就是没有精进、消沉、无力、被摧坏。昏沉和睡眠合在一起,就是昏沉睡眠。其中,昏沉以没有精进为特征,以去除精进为作用,以消沉为表现。睡眠以不堪能为特征,以笼罩为作用,以倦怠为表现,或者以点头打瞌睡为表现。这两者都以不如理作意于不乐、疲倦、伸懒腰等为生起的基础。巴利
Kāmīyantīti kāmā, pañca kāmaguṇā. Kāmesu chando kāmacchando. Kāmayatīti vā kāmo, kāmo eva chando, kāmacchando na kattukamyatāchando, na dhammacchando vā. Kāmataṇhāva evaṃnāmikā. Kusaladhamme nīvaratīti nīvaraṇaṃ, kāmacchando eva nīvaraṇaṃ kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi. Byāpajjati tena cittaṃ pūtibhāvaṃ upagacchati, byāpādayati vā vinayācārarūpasampattihitasukhādīnīti vā byāpādo. Thinanatā thinaṃ. Middhanatā middhaṃ, anussāhasaṃhananatā asattivighātatā cāti attho. Thinañca middhañca thinamiddhaṃ. Tattha thinaṃ anussāhanalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyavinodanarasaṃ, saṃsīdanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Middhaṃ akammaññatālakkhaṇaṃ, onahanarasaṃ, līnabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, pacalāyikāniddāpaccupaṭṭhānaṃ vā. Ubhayampi aratitandīvijambhitādīsu ayonisomanasikārapadaṭṭhānanti.
掉举的状态就是掉举。它以不寂静为特点,就像被风吹动的水;以不稳定为作用,就像被风吹动的旗子;以散乱为表现,就像被石头击中而扬起的灰尘;心的不寂静和不如理作意是它的来源。应当把它看作心的散乱。卑劣的行为叫“鄙作”,它的状态就是“恶作”。它以事后追悔为特点,以懊悔已做和未做的事为作用,以悔恨为表现,以已做和未做的事为来源,应当把它看作像奴役一样。掉举和恶作合在一起,就是“掉举恶作”。“疑”:因为没有治疗,所以叫疑;或者,在观察自性时,它让人疲惫、辛苦,所以叫疑。它以犹豫为特点,以摇摆为作用,以不确定为表现,或者以执取多端为表现,以不如理作意为来源。应当把它看作对修行的障碍。巴利
Uddhatassa bhāvo uddhaccaṃ. Taṃ avūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ vātābhighātacalajalaṃ viya, anavaṭṭhānarasaṃ vātābhighātacaladhajapaṭākaṃ viya, bhantattapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ pāsāṇābhighātasamuddhatabhasmaṃ viya , cetaso avūpasamo ayonisomanasikārapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Cittavikkhepoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kucchitaṃ kataṃ kukataṃ, tassa bhāvo kukkuccaṃ. Taṃ pacchānutāpalakkhaṇaṃ, katākatānusocanarasaṃ, vippaṭisārapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, katākatapadaṭṭhānaṃ dāsabyaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ . Uddhaccañca kukkuccañca uddhaccakukkuccaṃ. Vigatā cikicchāti vicikicchā, sabhāvaṃ vā vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamatīti vicikicchā, sā saṃsayalakkhaṇā, saṃsappanarasā, anicchayapaccupaṭṭhānā, anekaṃsaggāhapaccupaṭṭhānā vā, ayonisomanasikārapadaṭṭhānā. Paṭipattiantarāyakarāti daṭṭhabbā.
贪的特相是染着。嗔的特相是恼害。痴的特相是迷惑。忿的特相是愤恨,或者粗暴;作用是造成怨恨;现起是毁坏。恨的特相是怨恨;作用是不舍弃怨敌;现起是随逐于忿的状态。正如这样说:“前一时是忿,后一时是恨”等等。巴利
Rajjanalakkhaṇo rāgo. Dussanalakkhaṇo doso. Muyhanalakkhaṇo moho. Kujjhanalakkhaṇo kodho, caṇḍikkalakkhaṇo vā, āghātakaraṇaraso, dūsanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Upanandhanalakkhaṇo upanāho, veraappaṭinissajjanaraso, kodhānubandhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘pubbakālaṃ kodho, aparakālaṃ upanāho’’tiādi (vibha. 891).
抹恩的特相是抹杀他人的功德,作用是使那些功德消亡,现起是覆藏那些功德。攀比的特相是执取两端,作用是把他人功德与自己的功德等同起来,现起是以他人的功德为标准来衡量。巴利
Paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇo makkho. Tesaṃ vināsanaraso, tadacchādanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Yugaggāhalakkhaṇo paḷāso, paraguṇehi attano guṇānaṃ samīkaraṇaraso, paresaṃ guṇappamāṇena upaṭṭhānapaccupaṭṭhāno.
嫉妒的特相是见不得别人的成就,或者说是无法忍受别人的成就;它的作用是面对别人的成就时感到不欢喜;它的表现是背离那些成就。悭吝的特相是隐藏自己的成就;它的作用是无法忍受别人分享自己的成就;它的表现是收缩、放不开。巴利
Parasampattikhīyanalakkhaṇā issā, tassa akkhamanalakkhaṇā vā, tattha anabhiratirasā, tato vimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Attano sampattinigūhanalakkhaṇaṃ macchariyaṃ, attano sampattiyā parehi sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ akkhamanarasaṃ, saṅkocanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.
谄以掩盖已作的恶行为特相,作用是覆藏恶行,现起为遮盖。诳以宣扬自己本来没有的功德为特相,作用是显示那些功德,现起是即便通过身体姿势也要把那些功德显扬出来。巴利
Katapāpapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā māyā, tassa nigūhanarasā, tadāvaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānā. Attano avijjamānaguṇappakāsanalakkhaṇaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ, tesaṃ samudāharaṇarasaṃ, sarīrākārehipi tesaṃ vibhūtakaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.
骄的特相是心膨胀;作用是抗拒受教;现起是不柔软。忿的特相是争强好胜;作用是与人作对;现起是不恭敬。巴利
Cittassa uddhumātabhāvalakkhaṇo thambho, appatissavavuttiraso, amaddavapaccupaṭṭhāno. Karaṇuttariyalakkhaṇo sārambho, vipaccanīkatāraso, agāravapaccupaṭṭhāno.
慢的特点是抬高自己,作用是我执,表现是膨胀自大。过慢的特点是过分抬高自己,作用是极强的我执,表现是极度膨胀自大。巴利
Uṇṇatilakkhaṇo māno, ahaṃkāraraso, uddhumātabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno. Abbhuṇṇatilakkhaṇo atimāno, ativiya ahaṃkāraraso, accuddhumātabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno.
骄逸的特相是陶醉,作用是执取骄逸,现起是迷乱。放逸的特相是心在五种欲乐上放纵,作用是促成放纵,现起是失念。应当这样了知这些法的特相、作用、现起等。这里是简略说明,详细的说明则应当依照《分别论》中“其中,什么是忿?”等所说的方式来了知。巴利
Mattabhāvalakkhaṇo mado, madaggahaṇaraso, ummādapaccupaṭṭhāno . Pañcasu kāmaguṇesu cittassa vossaggalakkhaṇo pamādo, vossaggānuppadanaraso, sativippavāsapaccupaṭṭhānoti evaṃ imesaṃ dhammānaṃ lakkhaṇādīni veditabbāni. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana ‘‘tattha katamo kodho’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 891) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
这里要特别说明:贪图利养的人,自己得不到利养时,就对得到利养的人发怒。这种一旦生起就只是单纯愤怒的,就是忿。比这更进一步的是恨。他这样既愤怒又怀恨,即使别人确实有功德,也要贬低美德,还说“我也是一样”,从而抓住把柄争执不休。这就是他的抹杀功德和攀比。他这样抹杀功德、攀比,对别人的利养、恭敬等,嫉妒地想“这东西对他有什么用”,心生恼怒,这就是他的嫉妒。如果他自己有什么成就,却不能忍受和别人共享,这就是他的悭吝。为了利养,自己明明有过失也加以掩盖,这就是他的谄。没有功德也加以宣扬,这就是他的诳。他这样行事,如果如愿得到利养,就因此变得顽固,心不柔软,别人劝他“这事不该这样做”,他听不进去,这就是他的固执。如果有人对他说“这事不该这样做”,他就心生恼怒,眉头紧锁,蛮横地说“你算什么东西”,这就是他的忿。然后因为固执,他想“只有我最胜”,就成了慢者。因为忿,他轻视别人,想“这些人算什么”,就成了过慢者。这就是他的慢和过慢。他凭着慢和过慢,引生出由出身骄等种种形态的骄。陶醉之后,便在欲乐等种种事物上放逸。这就是他的骄和放逸,应当如此了知。巴利
Visesato cettha āmisagiddho attanā alabhanto aññassa lābhino kujjhati, tassa sakiṃ uppanno kodho kodhoyeva. Taduttari upanāho. So evaṃ kuddho upanayhanto ca santepi aññassa lābhino guṇaṃ makkheti ‘‘ahampi tādiso’’ti ca yugaggāhaṃ gaṇhāti. Ayamassa makkho ca palāso ca, so evaṃ makkhī palāsī tassa lābhasakkārādīsu ‘‘kiṃ imassa iminā’’ti issati padussati, ayamassa issā. Sace panassa kāci sampatti hoti, tassā tena sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ na sahati, idamassa maccheraṃ. Lābhahetu kho pana attano santepi dose paṭicchādeti, ayamassa māyā. Asantepi guṇe pakāseti, idamassa sāṭheyyaṃ. So evaṃ paṭipanno sace pana yathādhippāyaṃ lābhaṃ labhati, tena thaddho hoti amuducitto ‘‘na idaṃ evaṃ kātabba’’nti ovadituṃ asakkuṇeyyo, ayamassa thambho. Sace pana naṃ koci kiñci vadati ‘‘na idaṃ evaṃ kātabba’’nti, tena sāraddhacitto hoti, bhākuṭikamukho ‘‘ko me tva’’nti pasayhabhāṇī, ayamassa sārambho. Tato thambhena ‘‘ahameva seyyo’’ti attānaṃ maññanto mānī hoti. Sārambhena ‘‘ke ime’’ti pare atimaññanto atimānī, ayamassa māno ca atimāno ca. So tehi mānātimānehi jātimadādianekarūpaṃ madaṃ janeti, matto samāno kāmaguṇādibhedesu vatthūsu pamajjati, ayamassa mado ca pamādo cāti veditabbaṃ.
一切烦恼,就是一切不善法。因为它们有热恼和逼迫的作用,所以叫烦恼。因为被烦恼所败坏,所以叫恶行。因为它们造成烦恼性的不安,所以叫不安。因为它们造成内在燃烧等,所以叫燃烧。因为它们恒常热恼,所以叫热恼。因为它们从不善巧所生,并且是造作出来的,所以叫一切不善造作。巴利
Sabbe kilesāti sabbepi akusalā dhammā. Upatāpanaṭṭhena vibādhanaṭṭhena ca kilesā. Kilesapūtikattā duccaritā. Kilesadarathakaraṇaṭṭhena darathā. Antoḍāhādikaraṇaṭṭhena pariḷāhā. Sadā tāpanaṭṭhena santāpā. Akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena abhisaṅkharaṇaṭṭhena ca sabbe akusalābhisaṅkhārā.
“以什么意义”就是“以什么含义”。为了说明征服等种种含义,所以说了“逼迫故是灾患”等。“逼迫”是指令苦生起、压制。“导致退失”是指导致善法的舍弃。“于彼住”是指不善法在那身体中住着、安住、生起,这就是它的意思。“那些灾患”是指身恶行等祸患。“善法的障碍”是指对后面要说的、由正行道等善巧所生的诸法,导致隐没、不显现。“正行道”是指美好、值得称赞的道,不是邪道。“随顺行道”是指不违逆的道,不是逆行的道。“非敌对行道”是指没有敌对的道,是没有敌对的、没有敌人的道。“随义行道”是指随义而行、层层增上的道;也就是说,应当如义而行的道。“自利行道”这一读法并不好。“法随法行道”中,“法”是指九种出世间法。“随法”是指观等。随顺于彼法的法行道,就是法随法行道;对于这个法随法行道。巴利
Kenaṭṭhenāti kena atthena. Abhibhavanāditividhaṃ atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘parisahantīti parissayā’’tiādimāha. Parisahantīti dukkhaṃ uppādenti abhibhavanti. Parihānāya saṃvattantīti kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pariccajanāya saṃvattanti. Tatrāsayāti tasmiṃ sarīre akusalā dhammā āsayanti nivasanti uppajjantīti attho. Te parissayāti kāyaduccaritādayo upaddavā. Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ antarāyāyāti upari vattabbānaṃ sammāpaṭipadādito kosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ antaradhānāya adassanatthāya saṃvattanti. Sammāpaṭipadāyāti sundarāya pasaṭṭhāya vā paṭipadāya, na micchāpaṭipadāya. Anulomapaṭipadāyāti aviruddhapaṭipadāya, na paṭilomapaṭipadāya. Apaccanīkapaṭipadāyāti na paccanīkapaṭipadāya, apaccatthikapaṭipadāya. Anvatthapaṭipadāyāti atthaanugatāya paṭipadāya, uparūpari vaḍḍhitāya paṭipadāya. Yathā attho, tathā paṭipajjitabbāya paṭipadāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Attatthapaṭipadāyā’’tipi pāḷi, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Dhammānudhammapaṭipadāyāti dhammo nāma navalokuttaradhammo. Anudhammo nāma vipassanādi. Tassa dhammassa anurūpā dhammapaṭipadā dhammānudhammapaṭipadā, tassā dhammānudhammapaṭipadāya.
在戒上圆满实行,指的是在巴帝摩卡戒上做到圆满并安住。在诸根上守护门,指的是依照“以眼见色”等经文所说的方法,在意等六根上善加守护根门。在饮食上知量,指的是在受用饮食等时把握适量;放下过多的衣服等,只取适量的食物。巴利
Sīlesu paripūrikāritāyāti pātimokkhasīlesu pāripūriṃ katvā ṭhitatāya. Indriyesu guttadvāratāyāti ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.213; a. ni. 3.16; ma. ni. 2.24; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 18) nayena vuttesu manacchaṭṭhesu indriyesu sugopitadvārabhāvassa. Bhojane mattaññutāyāti paṭiggahaṇādīsu pamāṇayuttatāya. Alaṃsāṭakādiṃ muñcitvā mitabhojanatāya.
“警寤修习”是指依照“白天以经行、以坐禅,从障碍法中……”这样的方式,修习五种警寤法。“念与正知”是指对所有致力于一切业处修行的人、所有修行者,在任何时候都能带来利益的念与正知。巴利
Jāgariyānuyogassāti ‘‘divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehī’’ti (a. ni. 3.16; ma. ni. 2.24) evamādinā nayena pañca jāgaraṇadhamme anuyogassa. Satisampajaññassāti sabbakammaṭṭhānabhāvanānuyuttānaṃ sabbayogīnaṃ sabbadā upakārakassa satisampajaññassa.
对于“四念处”:在诸所缘中进入、跃入而现起,所以叫“处”;念本身就是处,所以叫“念处”。然而,对于身、受、心、法,它通过执取不净、苦、无常、无我之相,以及通过断除净想、乐想、常想、我想的作用而转起,因此有四种分别,这就是那四种念处。巴利
Satipaṭṭhānānanti ārammaṇesu okkantitvā pakkanditvā upaṭṭhānato paṭṭhānaṃ, satiyeva paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Kāyavedanācittadhammesu panassā asubhadukkhāniccānattākāragahaṇavasena subhasukhaniccattasaññāpahānakiccasādhanavasena ca pavattito catudhā pabhedo hoti, tesaṃ catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ.
对于四正勤:人们依靠它来精勤努力,所以叫“勤”;它是善美的勤,所以叫“正勤”;或者是以正确的方式精勤努力,所以叫“正勤”;又因为它远离烦恼的丑恶而是善美的,并且以能带来利益和安乐、导向最殊胜的状态、造成勤的性质,所以叫“正勤”——这是精进的同义语。再者,针对已生和未生的不善法、已生和未生的善法这四种,以断除、不令生起、令生起、令安住的作用来运作,因此有四种区分,这就是这四种正勤。巴利
Catunnaṃ sammappadhānānanti padahanti etenāti padhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ padhānaṃ sammappadhānaṃ, sammā vā padahanti etenāti sammappadhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā taṃ kilesavirūpattavirahato, padhānañca hitasukhanipphādakaṭṭhena seṭṭhabhāvāvahanato, padhānabhāvakaraṇato cāti sammappadhānaṃ, vīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Uppannuppannānaṃ anuppannuppannānañca catunnaṃ akusalakusalānaṃ pahānānuppattiuppādaṭṭhitikiccasādhanavasena pavattito panassa catudhā pabhedo hoti, tesaṃ catunnaṃ sammappadhānānaṃ.
对于“四神足”这句:在这里,欲、精进、心、观这四者中,每一个都能成就,所以叫“神变”,意思是圆满成办。或者,众生依靠它而成就、增长、达到殊胜,所以叫“神变”。按第一种含义,神变本身就是足,所以叫“神足”,意思是神变这一部分。按第二种含义,是神变的足,所以叫“神足”;“足”的意思是安立处、证得的方法。因为依靠它,人们一步步趋向、达到越来越殊胜的神变,所以叫“足”。这就是四神足。巴利
Catunnaṃ iddhipādānanti ettha chandavīriyacittavīmaṃsāsu ekeko ijjhatīti iddhi, samijjhati nipphajjatīti attho. Ijjhanti vā etāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi. Paṭhamena atthena iddhiyeva pādoti iddhipādo, iddhikoṭṭhāsoti attho. Dutiyena atthena iddhiyā pādoti iddhipādo, pādoti patiṭṭhā adhigamupāyoti attho. Tena hi yasmā uparūparivisesasaṅkhātaṃ iddhiṃ pajjanti pāpuṇanti, tasmā pādoti vuccati. Tesaṃ catunnaṃ iddhipādānaṃ.
七觉支:觉悟的支分,或者觉悟者的支分,就是觉支。这里说的是:有一种法的组合,在出世间道生起的那一刹那,它能对抗昏沉、掉举、停滞、过度用力、贪著欲乐、自我折磨、断见、常见等种种毛病,这个法的组合就是念、择法、精进、喜、轻安、定、舍。圣弟子靠这个法的组合而觉悟,所以它被称为“觉”——所谓觉悟,就是从烦恼沉睡中醒来,或者通达四圣谛,或者亲证涅槃。对于这个叫作“法的组合”的觉来说,那些支分就是觉支,就像禅支、道支那样。另外,前面说的那位靠这个法的组合而觉悟、被称为“觉”的圣弟子,这位觉者的支分也叫觉支,就像军支、车支那样。所以注疏师们说:“觉支就是觉悟之人的支分。”以上就是这七觉支。巴利
Sattannaṃ bojjhaṅgānanti bodhiyā, bodhissa vā aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti, yā esā dhammasāmaggī yāya lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe uppajjamānāya līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanakāmasukhattakilamathānuyogaucchedasassatābhinivesādīnaṃ anekesaṃ upaddavānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāya satidhammavicayavīriyapītipassaddhisamādhiupekkhāsaṅkhātāya dhammasāmaggiyā ariyasāvako bujjhatīti katvā ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati, bujjhatīti kilesasantānaniddāya uṭṭhahati, cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati, nibbānameva vā sacchikaroti, tassā dhammasāmaggisaṅkhātāya bodhiyā aṅgātipi bojjhaṅgā jhānaṅgamaggaṅgādīni viya. Yo panesa yathāvuttappakārāya etāya dhammasāmaggiyā bujjhatīti katvā ariyasāvako ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati, tassa bodhissa aṅgātipi bojjhaṅgā senaṅgarathaṅgādayo viya. Tenāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘bujjhanakassa puggalassa aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā’’ti. Tesaṃ sattannaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ.
对于“圣八支道”这句话:“圣”,是因为远离了各种应当由道断除的烦恼,因为能造就圣者的品质,因为能获得圣果,所以称为“圣”。具备八个支分,所以叫“八支”。而这条道,就像四支的军队、五支的乐器一样,只是支分本身而已,并没有脱离支分而独立存在的道。它趋向涅槃,或者能灭除烦恼而前行,所以称为“道”。这就是对圣八支道的修习。所谓“这些善法的障碍”,是指对如前所说的世间和出世间善法构成障碍——对出世间善法来说,是使它们消失的障碍;对世间善法来说,是使它们被舍弃的障碍。巴利
Ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassāti ariyoti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi ārakattā ariyabhāvakarattā ariyaphalapaṭilābhakarattā ca ariyo. Aṭṭhaṅgāni assāti aṭṭhaṅgiko. Svāyaṃ caturaṅgikā viya senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ viya ca tūriyaṃ aṅgamattameva hoti, aṅgavinimutto natthi. Nibbānaṃ maggati, kilese vā mārento gacchatīti maggo, tassa ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa bhāvanānuyogassa. Imesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānanti vuttappakārānaṃ lokiyalokuttarakusaladhammānaṃ. Antarāyāyāti lokuttarakusaladhammānaṃ antarāyāya antaradhānāya lokiyakusaladhammānaṃ pariccāgāya.
在这些当中,因为不给(出世间善法)生起的机会,所以称为“险难”。因为那些(险难)一旦生起就被灭掉,并不会带来灾祸。这里说的“在此”就是指在这个身体当中;“这些”就是指这些不善法。“恶的”意思是低劣的。“依止有身的”是说依靠身体、以身体为所缘而生起,所以叫依止有身的。“在水中”就是指在水里。巴利
Tesu lokuttarakusaladhammānaṃ uppajjituṃ appadānaṭṭhena parissayā nāma. Te hi uppajjitvā nirujjhamānā upaddavaṃ nāvahanti. Tattheteti tasmiṃ attabhāve ete. Pāpakāti lāmakā. Attabhāvasannissayāti attabhāvaṃ upanissāya ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjantīti attabhāvasannissayā. Daketi udake.
“已说过的”就是指这个,因为这件事已经讲过了。所谓“有随住者”,是因为与称为随住的烦恼一起居住,所以叫有随住者。所谓“有同行者”,是因为与称为现行的烦恼一起居住,所以叫有同行者。巴利
Vuttaṃhetanti kathitañhi etaṃ. Sāntevāsikoti antevāsikasaṅkhātena kilesena saha vasatīti sāntevāsiko. Sācariyakoti samudācaraṇasaṅkhātena kilesena saha vasatīti sācariyako.
用眼识看见色之后,就是以眼识看见色。“上面以耳听到声音”等说法,道理也是一样。“生起”就是现起活动。“种种寻思”是指在各种不同的所缘上,以游走的方式生起的种种构想。“应被结缚”是指成为所缘之后,通过结的系缚而利益诸结。“那些对于他”是指那些恶法对于这个人。“住在内部”是指住在内心的深处。“随流”是指跟随烦恼的相续,大量地流注、紧紧追随。“那些对于他”是指这些不善法系缚这位补特伽罗。“现行”是指正确地现行,也就是转起。巴利
Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ passitvā. Upari sotena saddaṃ sutvātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Uppajjantīti samudācaranti. Sarasaṅkappāti nānārammaṇe saṃsaraṇavasena uppannā parikappā. Saṃyojaniyāti ārammaṇabhāvaṃ upagantvā saṃyojanasambandhanena saṃyojanānaṃ hitā. Tyassāti te pāpakā assa puggalassa. Anto vasantīti abbhantare citte nivasanti. Anvāsavantīti kilesasantānaṃ anugantvā bhusaṃ savanti anubandhanti. Te nanti taṃ puggalaṃ ete akusalā dhammā. Samudācarantīti sammā ācaranti pavattantīti attho.
从染污的意义上说,它们是污垢。从敌对的意义上说,它们是怨敌。从仇恨的意义上说,它们是仇敌。从杀害的意义上说,它们是杀手。从对立的意义上说,它们是敌人。或者,污垢就像太阳的随烦恼云,怨敌就像太阳的烟,仇敌就像太阳的雪,杀手就像太阳的尘埃,敌人就像太阳的罗睺。有人这样解释:“污垢就像金子的垢,能破坏心的光辉;怨敌就像黑铁锈,能破坏内心的柔滑;仇敌就像战场上厮杀的仇敌,能破坏安住于心中的法;杀手就像杀人者,是法的杀害者;敌人就像国王的行刑人,是解脱道的障碍者。”巴利
Kilissanaṭṭhena malā. Sattuatthena amittā. Veriatthena sapattā. Hananaṭṭhena vadhakā. Paccāmittaṭṭhena paccatthikā. Atha vā malā sūriyassopakkilesavalāhakā viya. Amittā sūriyassa dhūmaṃ viya. Sapattā sūriyassa himaṃ viya. Vadhakā sūriyassa rajaṃ viya. Paccatthikā sūriyassa rāhu viya. ‘‘Malā suvaṇṇassa malaṃ viya cittappabhānāsakā. Amittā kāḷalohamalaṃ viya citte siniddhabhāvanāsakā, sapattā yuganaddhaṃ yujjhantā sapattā viya citte patiṭṭhitadhammadhaṃsakā. Vadhakā manussaghātakā viya dhammaghātakā. Paccatthikā raññā upagatassa vināso viya mokkhamaggassa paṭisedhakā’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
“能生起无益”是指:那不是利益,而是无益;它能令那种无益生起,所以叫“能生起无益”。那是什么呢?就是贪。“令心扰动”是指令心骚动、动摇,也就是遮止善法、障碍住心。“怖畏从内部生起”是指在自己内心当中生起,以能生起无益等作为怖畏的因。“人们不明白它”是指愚痴的大众不能了知、不能深入,所以不知道那种怖畏。“利益”是指贪婪的人不知道世间与出世间的利益。“法”是指它的因。“浓密黑暗”是指厚重的黑暗。“由于”是指因为什么,或者指哪个人。“压倒”是指征服、制伏。巴利
Anatthajananoti na atthaṃ anatthaṃ, taṃ anatthaṃ uppādetīti anatthajanano. Ko so? Lobho. Cittappakopanoti cittassa pakopano calano, kusalaṃ nivāretvā cittaṃ rundhatīti attho. Bhayamantarato jātanti abbhantare attano citteyeva jātaṃ, anatthajananādibhayahetu. Taṃ jano nāvabujjhatīti taṃ bhayaṃ bālamahājano avagantvā otaritvā na jānāti. Atthanti luddho puggalo lokiyalokuttaraatthaṃ na jānāti. Dhammanti tassa hetuṃ. Andhatamanti bahalandhakāraṃ. Yanti yasmā, yaṃ naraṃ vā. Sahateti abhibhavati.
“内在”是指自己相续里的。正在生起的就生起,是指从过去以上正在生起的,为了无益而生起,为了苦而生起;由于这两者,就导致不安乐住。“为了无益”,是指心所的苦。“为了苦”,是指身体的苦。“为了不安乐住”,是指由于这两者,不能安乐而住。或者,有些论师这样解释:“‘正在生起的就生起’,是从有分开始动摇,直到确定心为止,这期间叫‘正在生起’。到了确定之后,以不再退转的方式生起,才叫‘生起’。”巴利
Ajjhattanti sakasantāne. Uppajjamānā uppajjantīti pubbantato uddhaṃ uppajjamānā ahitāya uppajjanti dukkhāya . Tadubhayena aphāsuvihārāya. Ahitāyāti cetasikadukkhatthāya. Dukkhāyāti kāyikadukkhatthāya. Aphāsuvihārāyāti tadubhayena na sukhavihāratthāya. Atha vā ‘‘uppajjamānā uppajjantīti bhavaṅgacalanato paṭṭhāya yāva voṭṭhabbanā, tāva uppajjamānā nāma. Voṭṭhabbanaṃ pana patvā anivattanabhāvena uppajjanti nāmā’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
就像竹子被自己的果实毁掉,所谓竹子的实质也就这样坏掉了。不乐,就是对善法感到厌倦。乐,就是对五种欲乐感到迷恋。毛骨悚然,就是像荆棘一样,令身上的毛竖起来。以此为因,是说这个身体就是它们的因、它们的缘,所以叫以此为因。从此生,是从这个身体而生。从这个身体生起的种种心念,就像孩子们用长线绑住乌鸦的脚,把线头缠在自己手指上再放开它,乌鸦虽然飞到很远的地方,最后还是落回他们的脚边;同样,恶的寻思从这个身体生起,就这样把心系缚住。巴利
Tacasāraṃva samphalanti attano phalena nāsitaṃ tacasārasaṅkhātaṃ veḷu viya. Aratīti kusalesu dhammesu ukkaṇṭhitatā. Ratīti pañcakāmaguṇe abhirati. Lomahaṃsoti kaṇṭakasadiso hutvā uddhaggalomo. Itonidānāti ayaṃ attabhāvo nidānaṃ paccayo etesanti itonidānā. Itojāti ito attabhāvato jātā. Ito samuṭṭhāya manovitakkāti yathā dīghasuttakena pāde baddhaṃ kākaṃ kumārakā tassa suttassa pariyantaṃ aṅguliṃ veṭhetvā ossajjanti, so dūraṃ gantvāpi puna tesaṃ pādamūleyeva patati, evameva ito attabhāvato samuṭṭhāya pāpavitakkā cittaṃ ossajjanti.
以“有弟子者”等开头的第一经,是针对与烦恼共住而说的。以“比丘们,此三是内垢”等开头的第二经,是从染污善法以及不知义与非义的角度而说的。以“大王,有三种法在人内心生起”等开头的第三经,是从毁坏自身依止的角度而说的。以“贪与嗔以此为因”等开头的第四经,应当知道是从显示烦恼的住处而说的。巴利
‘‘Sāntevāsiko’’tiādikaṃ paṭhamasuttaṃ kilesena sahavāsaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tayome, bhikkhave, antarāmalā’’tiādikaṃ dutiyaṃ kusaladhammamalīnakaraṇavasena atthānatthassa ajānanavasena ca. ‘‘Tayo kho, mahārāja, purisassa dhammā ajjhattaṃ uppajjamānā’’tiādikaṃ tatiyaṃ attano nissayaghātanavasena. ‘‘Rāgo ca doso ca itonidānā’’tiādikaṃ catutthaṃ kilesānaṃ patiṭṭhādassanavasena vuttanti ñātabbaṃ.
从种种灾祸中受折磨,就是从这样那样的祸患中受折磨。“那个人”指的是具有上述那些烦恼的人。“苦紧随其后”,意思是苦跟着他走,就像吃奶的婴儿跟在母亲后面一样。“随行”,意思是紧挨着走,就像刽子手跟着被押赴刑场的死囚一样。“成为随从”,意思是紧密相随,就像法律条文中的章节紧密相连一样。“生苦”中的“生”字,先说了它有多种含义。比如:巴利
Tato tato parissayatoti tamhā tamhā upaddavā. Taṃ puggalanti vuttappakārakilesasamaṅgīpuggalaṃ. Dukkhaṃ anvetīti dukkhaṃ anu eti mātu pacchato khīrapivako viya. Anugacchatīti samīpaṃ gacchati coraghātako viya vajjhappattassa . Anvāyikaṃ hotīti sampattaṃ hoti dhammaganthikāya paricchedo viya. Jātidukkhanti jātisaddassa tāva aneke atthā paveditā. Yathā –
存在、家族、群体,戒、施设、相状;
出生与结生,这些都说明了“生”的含义。巴利
Bhavo kulaṃ nikāyo ca, sīlaṃ paññatti lakkhaṇaṃ; Pasūti sandhi cevāti, jātiatthā paveditā.
正是如此,在这里,“生”的意思是“存在”。比如在“一生、两生”等说法中就是如此。在“不因出身而被轻视、被指责”这句里,“生”指的是家族。在“毗舍佉,有一种叫尼干陀的沙门种类”这句里,指的是部类。在“姊妹,自从我以圣者的生而生以来,我不记得……”这句里,指的是圣戒。在“有一种叫直生的草,从肚脐长出来,顶到天上立着”这句里,指的是施设。在“生由二蕴所摄”这句里,指的是有为相。在“阿难,菩萨刚降生”这句里,指的是出生。而在“有缘生”以及“生也是苦”这两处,从引申义来说,指的是结生的那一刹那;但从严格意义上说,则是在各处正在出生的有情,其种种蕴显现出来时,那些蕴最初的显现,就叫作“生”。巴利
Tathā hissa ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’tiādīsu (pārā. 12; dī. ni. 1.31; ma. ni. 2.257) bhavo attho. ‘‘Akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.303) ettha kulaṃ. ‘‘Atthi, visākhe, nigaṇṭhā nāma samaṇajātī’’ti (a. ni. 3.71) ettha nikāyo. ‘‘Yatohaṃ, bhagini, ariyāya jātiyā jāto nābhijānāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.351) ettha ariyasīlaṃ. ‘‘Tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti nābhiyā uggantvā nabhaṃ āhacca ṭhitā ahosī’’ti (a. ni. 5.196) ettha paññatti. ‘‘Jāti dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahitā’’ti (dhātu. 71) ettha saṅkhatalakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto’’ti (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207) ettha pasūti. ‘‘Bhavapaccayā jātī’’ti (mahāva. 1; udā. 1; ma. ni. 1.403; saṃ. ni. 2.53; vibha. 225; kathā. 450) ca, ‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’ti (mahāva. 14; vibha. 190; dī. ni. 2.387; ma. ni. 2.373; saṃ. ni. 5.1081; paṭi. ma. 2.30) ca ettha pariyāyato paṭisandhikkhaṇo, nippariyāyato pana tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ tesaṃ paṭhamapātubhāvo jāti nāma.
那么,这个“生”为什么是苦呢?因为它是许多苦的依托之处。苦确实有很多种,比如:苦苦、坏苦、行苦、隐覆苦、非隐覆苦、同义苦、非同义苦。巴利
Kasmā panesā jāti dukkhāti ce? Anekesaṃ dukkhānaṃ vatthubhāvato. Anekāni hi dukkhāni. Seyyathidaṃ – dukkhadukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ saṅkhāradukkhaṃ paṭicchannadukkhaṃ appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ pariyāyadukkhaṃ nippariyāyadukkhanti.
在这里,身苦和心苦这两种苦受,因为从自性上和从名称上都是苦,所以称为“苦苦”。巴利
Tattha kāyikacetasikā dukkhavedanā sabhāvato ca nāmato ca dukkhattā ‘‘dukkhadukkha’’nti vuccati.
乐受因为会变坏、会引生苦,所以是坏苦。舍受以及其余三地的诸行,因为被生灭逼迫,所以是行苦。巴利
Sukhavedanā vipariṇāmena dukkhuppattihetuto vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ. Upekkhāvedanā ceva avasesā ca tebhūmakā saṅkhārā udayabbayapīḷitattā saṅkhāradukkhaṃ.
像耳痛、牙痛,以及由贪欲、嗔恨、愚痴所生的灼热苦恼等身心疾病,因为要问过才知道,而且对治方法也不明显,所以是“隐覆苦”。也称为“不明显苦”。巴利
Kaṇṇasūladantasūlarāgajapariḷāhadosamohajapariḷāhādi kāyikacetasiko ābādho pucchitvā jānitabbato upakkamassa ca apākaṭabhāvato paṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Apākaṭadukkhantipi vuccati.
由三十二种业行等所引发的病痛,因为不用问就能知道,而且对治方法也很明显,所以是“不隐藏的苦”。也称为“明显的苦”。巴利
Dvattiṃsakammakāraṇādisamuṭṭhāno ābādho apucchitvāva jānitabbato upakkamassa ca pākaṭabhāvato appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Pākaṭadukkhantipi vuccati.
除了苦苦之外,《苦谛分别》里讲到的生等其余一切苦,因为都是各种苦的依托处,所以叫作“引申意义上的苦”。而苦苦则被称为“非引申意义上的苦”。巴利
Ṭhapetvā dukkhadukkhaṃ sesaṃ dukkhasaccavibhaṅge āgataṃ jātiādi sabbampi tassa tassa dukkhassa vatthubhāvato pariyāyadukkhaṃ. Dukkhadukkhaṃ pana nippariyāyadukkhanti vuccati.
这里所说的“生”,即世尊在《愚人与智者经》等经(《中部》3.246等)中以譬喻所说明的恶趣之苦,以及即使在善趣的人间,以入胎为根本等各类情况下所产生的苦——由于它是那些苦的所依处,所以是苦。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ jāti yaṃ taṃ bālapaṇḍitasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.246 ādayo) bhagavatāpi upamāvasena pakāsitaṃ āpāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yañca sugatiyampi manussaloke gabbhokkantimūlakādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tassa vatthubhāvato dukkhā.
在这里,以入胎为根本等类别的苦是这样的:当有情在母胎中受生时,并不是投生在青莲、红莲、白莲等花中,而是在胃的下方、熟脏的上方、腹膜与背脊骨之间——那个地方极其狭窄,极度黑暗,被种种尸臭浸透,有不净且极其恶臭的风在其中流动,令人极端厌恶。他就像在臭鱼、腐坏的豆粥、腐尸等物中生出的蛆虫一样,在那里受生。受生之后,十个月里,他被母胎所产生的热力蒸煮,像被陶罐焖烧一样,像面团一样被蒸熟,完全无法弯曲、伸直身体,遭受极大的苦。这就是以入胎为根本的苦。巴利
Tatridaṃ gabbhokkantimūlakādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ – ayañhi satto mātukucchimhi nibbattamāno na uppalapadumapuṇḍarikādīsu nibbattati, atha kho heṭṭhā āmāsayassa upari pakkāsayassa udarapaṭalapiṭṭhikaṇṭakānaṃ vemajjhe paramasambādhe tibbandhakāre nānākuṇapagandhaparibhāvite asuciparamaduggandhapavanavicarite adhimattajegucche kucchippadese pūtimacchapūtikummāsacandanikādīsu kimi viya nibbattati. So tattha nibbatto dasa māse mātukucchisambhavena usmanā puṭapākaṃ viya paccamāno piṭṭhapiṇḍi viya sediyamāno samiñjanapasāraṇādivirahito adhimattaṃ dukkhaṃ paccanubhotīti, idaṃ tāva gabbhokkantimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
而当母亲突然绊倒、行走、坐下、站起、转身等时候,他就像落入醉汉手中的山羊,又像落入耍蛇人手中的小蛇,被拉扯、拖拽、摇晃、抖动等种种动作折磨,感受极大的痛苦;母亲喝冷水时,他就像堕入寒地狱的众生;母亲吃热粥、饭食等时,他就像被炭火雨浇打;母亲吃咸、酸等物时,他就像遭受碱水灌洗等刑罚的人,感受剧烈的痛苦。这就是以护胎为根源的苦。巴利
Yaṃ pana so mātu sahasā upakkhalanagamananisīdanavuṭṭhānaparivattanādīsu surādhuttahatthagato eḷako viya ahituṇḍikahatthagato sappapotako viya ca ākaḍḍhanaparikaḍḍhanaodhunanaddhunanādinā upakkamena adhimattaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavati, yañca mātu sītudakapānakāle sītanarakupapanno viya uṇhayāgubhattādiajjhoharaṇakāle aṅgāravuṭṭhisamparikiṇṇo viya loṇambilādiajjhoharaṇakāle khārāpaṭicchakādikammakāraṇapatto viya tibbaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhoti, idaṃ gabbhapariharaṇamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
当母亲怀了死胎,亲友等人本来就不该去看那个生苦的地方,而她因为切割、剖开等手术而受苦,这就是以胎坏为根本的苦。巴利
Yaṃ panassa mūḷhagabbhāya mātuyā mittāmaccasuhajjādīhipi adassanārahe dukkhuppattiṭṭhāne chedanaphālanādīhi dukkhaṃ uppajjati, idaṃ gabbhavipattimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
当母亲正在分娩时,业力所生的风把他翻转过来,推着他进入像地狱悬崖一样极其恐怖的产道;他又被极其狭窄的产门挤压,就像一头巨象被从钥匙孔里硬拽出来一样,也像地狱众生被众合山碾压得粉碎一样,这时生起的苦,就是以分娩为根源的苦。巴利
Yaṃ vijāyamānāya mātuyā kammajehi vātehi parivattetvā narakapapātaṃ viya atibhayānakaṃ yonimaggaṃ paṭipātiyamānassa paramasambādhena ca yonimukhena tāḷacchiggaḷena viya mahānāgassa nikaḍḍhiyamānassa narakasattassa viya ca saṅghātapabbatehi vicuṇṇiyamānassa dukkhaṃ uppajjati, idaṃ vijāyanamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
婴儿出生后,身体像嫩伤口一样柔软娇嫩,在被抱持、沐浴、洗涤、用布擦拭等时候,会生起像被针尖和剃刀锋刃刺割一样的痛苦,这就是以出离母胎为根源的苦。巴利
Yaṃ pana jātassa taruṇavaṇasadisasukhumālasarīrassa hatthaggahaṇanhāpanadhovanacoḷaparimajjanādikāle sūcimukhakhuradhārāhi vijjhanaphālanasadisaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, idaṃ mātukucchito bahinikkhamanamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
另外,此后在生命流转中,自己亲手伤害自己,比如修裸形外道等苦行,专门折磨烧灼自己,或者因为嗔怒而不吃东西、上吊自杀,由此产生的痛苦,就是以自己攻击为根源的苦。巴利
Yaṃ pana tato paraṃ pavattiyaṃ attanāva attānaṃ vadhentassa acelakavatādivasena ātāpanaparitāpanānuyogamanuyuttassa kodhavasena abhuñjantassa ubbandhantassa ca dukkhaṃ hoti, idaṃ attūpakkamamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
而当一个人遭受他人杀害、捆绑等对待时生起的痛苦,这就是以他人加害为根源的苦。巴利
Yaṃ pana parato vadhabandhanādīni anubhavantassa dukkhaṃ uppajjati, idaṃ parūpakkamamūlakaṃ dukkhanti.
就这样,对于这一切苦来说,生本身就是它们的依托处,而此生苦则伴随着它。巴利
Iti imassa sabbassāpi dukkhassa ayaṃ jāti vatthumeva hoti, idaṃ jātidukkhaṃ anveti.
所谓老苦,老有两种:一种是有为相,另一种是在相续中被认为衰败等,也就是限于一期生命里诸蕴的老朽状态,这里指的是后者。而这老本身就是苦,因为它既是行苦的性质,也是苦的所依。由于肢体松弛、诸根变异而变得丑陋、青春消逝、力量被毁、念与慧极度衰退、被他人轻视等种种原因,身体上和心理上的苦生起时,老就是这些苦的所依。因此这样说:巴利
Jarādukkhanti duvidhā jarā – saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpanno khandhapurāṇabhāvo ca, sā idha adhippetā. Sā panesā dukkhā saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato ceva dukkhavatthuto ca. Yaṃ hidaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgasithilabhāvato indriyavikāravirūpatā yobbanavināsabalūpaghātasatimativippavāsaparaparibhavādianekapaccayaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ dukkhamuppajjati, jarā tassa vatthu. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
因为肢体变得松弛,因为诸根发生变异;
青春消逝,体力衰败。
因为与自己的子女妻子等数百人分离而漂泊在外,
因为令人不悦,而且更会让人陷入愚痴。
众生所感受到的苦,有身体上的,也有心理上的。
这一切都以老为原因,因此老就是苦。巴利
‘‘Aṅgānaṃ sithilabhāvā, indriyānaṃ vikārato; Yobbanassa vināsena, balassa upaghātato. ‘‘Vippavāsā satādīnaṃ, puttadārehi attano; Appasādanīyato ceva, bhiyyo bālattapattiyā. ‘‘Pappoti dukkhaṃ yaṃ macco, kāyikaṃ mānasaṃ tathā; Sabbametaṃ jarāhetu, yasmā tasmā jarā dukhā’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 192; visuddhi. 2.542);
这个“老苦”一直跟随着,这就是它们之间的关联。所谓“病”,就是带来种种苦、造成种种苦,所以叫病;或者说,它让人患病、受煎熬、被搅动,所以叫病。巴利
Idaṃ jarādukkhaṃ anvetīti sambandho. Byādhīti vividhaṃ dukkhaṃ ādahati vidahatīti byādhi. Byādhayati tāpayati kampayatīti vā byādhi.
关于“死苦”,这里也要知道“死”有两种:一种是有为法的特相,针对这种死,论中说“老死由两蕴所摄”(《界论》71)。另一种是在同一期生命里,命根的相续被切断,针对这种死,经中说“恒常为死所怖”(《经集》581;《本生》1.11.88)。这里要说的,正是后一种。以生为缘的死,也叫“预备死”“自然死”“寿尽死”“福尽死”——这些都是同一个死的不同名称。此外,还应当知道有“刹那死”“世俗死”“断灭死”这些分类。在生命相续的过程中,色法和非色法的坏灭,叫“刹那死”。像“帝须死了”“补沙死了”这样的说法,因为从究竟义上讲并没有众生存在,所以叫“世俗死”;说“谷物死了”“树死了”,也是因为没有命根,同样叫“世俗死”。漏尽者的命终不再有结生,叫“断灭死”。在这里,除了外在的世俗死,其余那种世俗死也以所说的生命相续断绝这一层含义被包含在内;而它因为是苦的所依处,所以本身就是苦。因此这样说:巴利
Maraṇadukkhanti etthāpi duvidhaṃ maraṇaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahita’’nti (dhātu. 71). Ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyapabandhavicchedo ca, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘niccaṃ maraṇato bhaya’’nti (su. ni. 581; jā. 1.11.88). Taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Jātipaccayā maraṇaṃ upakkamamaraṇaṃ sarasamaraṇaṃ āyukkhayamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayamaraṇantipi tasseva nāmaṃ. Puna khaṇikamaraṇaṃ sammutimaraṇaṃ samucchedamaraṇanti ayampi bhedo veditabbo. Pavatte rūpārūpadhammānaṃ bhedo khaṇikamaraṇaṃ nāma. Tisso mato phusso matoti idaṃ paramatthato sattassa abhāvā, sassaṃ mataṃ, rukkho matoti idampi jīvitindriyassa abhāvā sammutimaraṇaṃ nāma. Khīṇāsavassa appaṭisandhikā kālakiriyā samucchedamaraṇaṃ nāma. Bāhirasammutimaraṇaṃ ṭhapetvā itaraṃ sammutimaraṇañca idha yathāvuttappabandhavicchedanabhāvena saṅgahitaṃ, dukkhassa pana vatthubhāvato dukkhaṃ. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
造恶的人,随观恶业等的征兆;
对于贤善而正忍受不幸者,与所爱事物之分离。
临死的时候,那种苦,总的来说就是心里的苦。
一切众生中,那关节、筋腱等被切断等之事
当要害处被刺穿时,就会产生身体上的痛苦。
这苦既无法忍受,又无从补救,因为……
死亡是它的所依处,因此才说死亡就是苦。巴利
‘‘Pāpassa pāpakammādi-nimittamanupassato; Bhaddassāpasahantassa, viyogaṃ piyavatthukaṃ; Mīyamānassa yaṃ dukkhaṃ, mānasaṃ avisesato. ‘‘Sabbesañcāpi yaṃ sandhi-bandhanacchedanādikaṃ; Vitujjamānamammānaṃ, hoti dukkhaṃ sarīrajaṃ. ‘‘Asayhamappatikāraṃ, dukkhassetassidaṃ yato; Maraṇaṃ vatthu tenetaṃ, dukkhamicceva bhāsita’’nti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 193; visuddhi. 2.543);
在“愁、悲、苦、忧、恼”这些苦当中,所谓“愁”,是指人遭到亲属离散等不幸打击时,内心那种向内烧灼、煎熬的状态。而这里的“苦”,既因为它是苦苦,又因为它是其他苦的依托之处。因此这样说:巴利
Sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsadukkhanti ettha sokādīsu soko nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa antonijjhānalakkhaṇo cittasantāpo. Dukkho panassa dukkhadukkhattā ceva dukkhassa ca vatthubhāvato. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
忧愁像一支箭,直直刺穿众生的心脏;
就像被火烧红的箭,还会再次猛烈地燃烧。
并且会带来病、老、死的坏灭。
因为苦有种种,所以称为苦。巴利
‘‘Sattānaṃ hadayaṃ soko, sallaṃ viya vitujjati; Aggitattova nārāco, bhusañca ḍahate puna. ‘‘Samāvahati ca byādhi-jarāmaraṇabhedanaṃ; Dukkhampi vividhaṃ yasmā, tasmā dukkhoti vuccatī’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 194; visuddhi. 2.544);
所谓悲叹,就是人在遭遇失去亲人等灾祸时所说出的哀伤话语。它之所以是苦,是因为它的本质就是轮回中的苦,也是苦产生的基础。因此,这样说:巴利
Paridevo nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa vacīpalāpo. Dukkho panassa saṃsāradukkhabhāvato dukkhavatthuto ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
当人被忧箭射中,哭泣哀号,喉咙、嘴唇、上腭和舌头干得受不了,
他只会越来越苦,所以世尊把悲叹也叫做苦。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ sokasallavihato paridevamāno, kaṇṭhoṭṭhatālutalasosajamappasayhaṃ; Bhiyyodhimattamadhigacchatiyeva dukkhaṃ, dukkhoti tena bhagavā paridevamāhā’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 195; visuddhi. 2.545);
所谓苦,就是以逼迫身体为特征的身苦。它之所以叫苦,一方面是因为它本身就是苦,另一方面是因为它会带来心里的苦。因此这样说:巴利
Dukkhaṃ nāma kāyapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ. Dukkhaṃ panassa dukkhadukkhattā ceva mānasadukkhāvahanato ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
这身的苦在逼迫身体,而心的苦还要更重;
因为它能引生苦,所以特别被称为“苦”。巴利
‘‘Pīḷeti kāyikamidaṃ, dukkhaṃ dukkhañca mānasaṃ bhiyyo; Janayati yasmā tasmā, dukkhanti visesato vutta’’nti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 196-197; visuddhi. 2.546);
所谓“忧”,它的特相是压迫内心,是心里的苦。它之所以是苦,一方面因为它本身就是苦,另一方面因为它能带来身体的痛苦。被心苦逼到极点的人,会披散头发嚎哭,捶打胸口,翻来滚去,转身打转,跳下悬崖,拿刀自残,吞毒,上吊,投火,承受各种各样的痛苦。因此说:巴利
Domanassaṃ nāma cittapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ mānasaṃ dukkhaṃ. Dukkhaṃ panassa dukkhadukkhattā ceva kāyikadukkhāvahanato ca. Cetodukkhasamappitā hi kese pakiriya kandanti, urāni patipisenti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti, chinnapapātaṃ papatanti, satthaṃ āharanti, visaṃ khādanti, rajjuyā ubbandhanti, aggiṃ pavisanti, nānappakāraṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavanti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
‘‘Pīḷeti yato cittaṃ, kāyassa ca pīḷanaṃ samāvahati;
所谓苦,也包括忧;因此亦称忧为苦。巴利
Dukkhanti domanassampi, domanassaṃ tato ahū’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 196-197; visuddhi. 2.547);
所谓“绝望”,是指遭遇亲属离散等不幸的人,被极度的心苦所产生出来的嗔。有些人认为,它是属于行蕴的一种法。而它是苦,因为它是行苦,会烧灼内心,也会摧损身体。因此这样说:巴利
Upāyāso nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa adhimattacetodukkhappabhāvito dosoyeva. Saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpanno eko dhammoti eke. Dukkho panassa saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato cittaṃ paridahanato kāyassa vihananato ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
心被极度灼烧,身体也遭到摧损;
这种由绝望引生的苦,因此被称为“苦”。巴利
‘‘Cittassa ca paridahanā, kāyassa vihananato ca adhimattaṃ; Yaṃ dukkhamupāyāso, janeti dukkho tato vutto’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 198; visuddhi. 2.548);
在这里,忧愁就像用小火在容器里煮东西;悲泣就像用大火煮的时候,东西从容器里溢出来;绝望则像溢出来之后剩下的东西再也倒不出去,只能在容器里一直煮到耗尽。巴利
Ettha ca mandagginā antobhājane pāko viya soko, tikkhagginā paccamānassa bhājanato bahi nikkhamanaṃ viya paridevo, bahi nikkhantāvasesassa nikkhamitumpi appahontassa antobhājaneyeva yāva parikkhayā pāko viya upāyāso daṭṭhabbo.
地狱众生的苦,是指在地狱中紧随众生的五种系缚等种种痛苦,这应该用《天使经》来说明。因此,这样说——巴利
Nerayikaṃ dukkhanti niraye pañcavidhabandhanādikaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti, taṃ devadūtasuttena dīpetabbaṃ. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
如果众生不投生到地狱里,那火烧等等难以忍受的痛苦——
苦到底能在哪里找到立足之处呢?所以牟尼在这里说:“生就是苦。”巴利
‘‘Jāyetha no ce narakesu satto, tatthaggidāhādikamappasayhaṃ; Labhetha dukkhaṃ nu kuhiṃ patiṭṭhaṃ, iccāha dukkhāti munīdha jāti’’nti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 191; visuddhi. 2.541);
畜生道里的苦,说的是在畜生当中被鞭子抽、棍棒打、刺戳等等各种各样的痛苦一直跟着它们,这要从《愚人智者经》里去了解。因此这样说:巴利
Tiracchānayonikaṃdukkhanti tiracchānesu kasāpatodatāḷanavijjhanādikaṃ anekavidhaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti, taṃ bālapaṇḍitasuttato gahetabbaṃ. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
畜生道中,有被鞭子抽、被棍棒打、被尖刺戳等等各种各样的苦。
那生如何能在那里存在?没有在那里的生,则仍有苦。巴利
‘‘Dukkhaṃ tiracchesu kasāpatodadaṇḍābhighātādibhavaṃ anekaṃ; Yaṃ taṃ kathaṃ tattha bhaveyya jātiṃ, vinā tahiṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 191; visuddhi. 2.541);
饿鬼界的苦:在饿鬼当中,由饥渴、风热等所生起的苦,以及在世界中间那极度黑暗之处难以忍受的严寒等苦,都一直跟随着他们。因此,这样说:巴利
Pettivisayikaṃ dukkhanti petesu pana khuppipāsa vātātapādinibbattaṃ dukkhañca lokantare tibbandhakāre asayhasītādidukkhañca anveti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
在饿鬼当中,还有由饥渴、狂风、烈日等所产生的种种痛苦;
因为对于尚未出生的人来说,那里并不存在这种苦,所以牟尼也说生就是苦。
在极度黑暗和难以忍受的寒冷中,以及在世界之间的阿修罗那里所承受的痛苦;
若无彼,则彼处亦无其生;而此生比彼处更苦。巴利
‘‘Petesu dukkhaṃ pana khuppipāsāvātātapādippabhavaṃ vicittaṃ; Yasmā ajātassa na tattha atthi, tasmāpi dukkhaṃ muni jātimāha. ‘‘Tibbandhakāre ca asayhasīte, lokantare yaṃ asuresu dukkhaṃ; Na taṃ bhave tattha na cassa jāti, yato ayaṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 191; visuddhi. 2.541);
人间之苦,是指在人当中被杀、被绑等痛苦。以入胎为根本的苦,是指按照“这个众生投生到母胎里时,并不是投生在青莲、红莲、白莲等当中……”这类方式所说的那种生苦,这里说的正是这种以入胎为根本的苦。以住胎为根本的苦,是指按照“母亲突然踉跄、行走、坐下……”这类方式所说的那种剧烈痛苦,这就是以住胎为根本的苦。以出胎为根本的苦,是指按照“当母亲胎位不正时,在那种连朋友、同僚、亲友等都不该看到的产生痛苦之处……”这类方式所说的苦,这就是从母胎出来之后为根本的苦。因此这样说——巴利
Mānusikaṃ dukkhanti manussesu vadhabandhanādikaṃ dukkhaṃ. Gabbhokkantimūlakaṃ dukkhanti ‘‘ayañhi satto mātukucchimhi nibbattamāno na uppalapadumapuṇḍarikādīsu nibbattatī’’tiādinā nayena yaṃ jātidukkhaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ tāva gabbhokkantimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti. Gabbhe ṭhitimūlakaṃ dukkhanti yaṃ pana ‘‘so mātu sahasā upakkhalanagamananisīdanā’’tiādinā nayena yaṃ tibbaṃ dukkhaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ gabbhe ṭhitimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti. Gabbhā vuṭṭhānamūlakaṃ dukkhanti ‘‘yaṃ panassa mūḷhagabbhāya mātuyā mittāmaccasuhajjādīhipi adassanārahe dukkhuppattiṭṭhāne’’tiādinā nayena yaṃ dukkhaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ mātukucchito bahi nikkhantamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
就像在粪尿地狱里一样,在母胎之中,
众生长久居住,也从此向外出离;
即使极其可怕、令人毛骨悚然的苦,这也并不存在,
即使没有生,这生本身也是苦。
说那么多有什么用呢?岂非无论在哪里,凡……
这里有时也会有哪怕一点点此苦。
于离生中实无有,是故大仙说:
他说“苦”,这是最先说的,指的就是“生”。巴利
‘‘Yañcāpi gūthanarake viya mātugabbhe, Satto vasaṃ ciramato bahi nikkhamanañca; Pappoti dukkhamatighoramidampi natthi, Jātiṃ vinā itipi jāti ayañhi dukkhā. ‘‘Kiṃ bhāsitena bahunā nanu yaṃ kuhiñci, Atthīdha kiñcirapi dukkhamidaṃ kadāci; Nevatthi jātivirahe yadato mahesi, Dukkhāti sabbapaṭhamaṃ imamāha jāti’’nti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 191; visuddhi. 2.541);
出生后随之而来的苦,是指伴随出生而来的沐浴、涂油、咀嚼、饮用等种种照料所带来的苦,这苦一直跟着他。出生后归属于他人的苦,是指受别人、受他人支配而不得自在的苦,这苦一直跟着他。因为经上说:一切受他人控制都是苦。自己加害自己的苦,是指自己伤害自己时所产生的苦,比如修裸形外道等苦行、自我煎迫折磨,或因嗔怒而绝食、上吊自杀的人所生的苦,这苦一直跟着他。他人加害的苦,是指从他人那里遭受杀害、捆绑等而产生的苦,这苦一直跟着他。苦苦,是指身体和心里的苦受,因为从自性和名称上都是苦,所以叫苦苦,这苦一直跟着他。行苦,是指舍受以及其余三地的诸行,因为被生灭所逼迫,所以叫行苦,这苦一直跟着他。坏苦,是指乐受,因为它是变异之苦的原因,所以叫坏苦,这苦一直跟着他。巴利
Jātassūpanibandhakaṃ dukkhanti jātassa upanibandhanaṃ nhānalepanakhādanapivanādijagganadukkhaṃ anveti. Jātassa parādheyyakaṃ dukkhanti parassa aññassa āyattaṃ issariyadukkhaṃ anveti. ‘‘Sabbaṃ paravasaṃ dukkha’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Attūpakkamaṃ dukkhanti yaṃ attanāva attānaṃ vadhentassa acelakavatādivasena ātāpanaparitāpanānuyogamanuyuttassa kodhavasena abhuñjantassa ubbandhantassa ca dukkhaṃ hoti, idaṃ attūpakkamaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti. Parūpakkamaṃ dukkhanti yaṃ parato vadhabandhanādīni anubhavantassa uppajjati, idaṃ parūpakkamaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti. Dukkhadukkhanti kāyikacetasikā dukkhā vedanā sabhāvato ca nāmato ca dukkhattā dukkhadukkhaṃ, idaṃ dukkhadukkhaṃ anveti. Saṅkhāradukkhanti upekkhāvedanā ceva avasesā ca tebhūmakasaṅkhārā udayabbayapīḷitattā saṅkhāradukkhaṃ, idaṃ saṅkhāradukkhaṃ anveti. Vipariṇāmadukkhanti sukhavedanā vipariṇāmadukkhassa hetuto vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ, idaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ anveti.
母亲死亡,就是母亲的死。父亲死亡,就是父亲的死。兄弟死亡,就是哥哥和弟弟的死。姊妹死亡,就是姐姐和妹妹的死。儿子死亡,就是儿子们的死。女儿死亡,就是女儿们的死。亲族灾祸之苦,就是亲族的灾祸,也就是因为盗贼、疾病、恐惧等而导致亲族被毁、亲族灭亡,这就是它的意思。被那亲族灾祸所触及、所笼罩、所压制的他,心中生起的苦,就是亲族灾祸之苦;那亲族灾祸之苦一直跟着他。其余各项也是同样的道理。不过这里有一个差别:财产的灾祸就是财产灾祸,也就是因为国王、盗贼等而导致财产被毁、财产灭亡,这就是它的意思。按照上面所说的方式,那财产灾祸之苦一直跟着他。疾病灾祸,就是疾病本身就是灾祸。因为疾病会破坏、毁灭健康,所以叫灾祸。按照上面所说的方式,那疾病灾祸之苦一直跟着他。戒灾祸之苦,就是戒的灾祸,也就是戒的毁坏,这是破戒的别名。按照上面所说的方式,那戒灾祸之苦一直跟着他。正在毁坏正见而生起的邪见本身就是灾祸,就是见灾祸。按照上面所说的方式,那见灾祸之苦一直跟着他。在这里,前两种不是究竟法,后三种是究竟法,并且被三共相所触及。前三种既不是善也不是不善。戒灾祸和见灾祸这两种是不善。巴利
Mātumaraṇanti mātuyā maraṇaṃ. Pitumaraṇanti pituno maraṇaṃ. Bhātumaraṇanti jeṭṭhakaniṭṭhabhātūnaṃ maraṇaṃ. Bhaginimaraṇanti jeṭṭhakaniṭṭhabhaginīnaṃ maraṇaṃ. Puttamaraṇanti puttānaṃ maraṇaṃ. Dhītumaraṇanti dhītūnaṃ maraṇaṃ. Ñātibyasanaṃ dukkhanti ñātīnaṃ byasanaṃ, corarogabhayādīhi ñātikkhayo, ñātivināsoti attho. Tena ñātibyasanena phuṭṭhassa ajjhotthaṭassa abhibhūtassa uppannaṃ dukkhaṃ ñātibyasanaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ ñātibyasanaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – bhogānaṃ byasanaṃ bhogabyasanaṃ, rājacorādivasena bhogakkhayo, bhogavināsoti attho. Vuttanayena taṃ bhogabyasanaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti. Rogabyasananti rogo eva byasanaṃ rogabyasanaṃ. Rogo hi ārogyaṃ byasati vināsetīti byasanaṃ, vuttanayena taṃ rogabyasanaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti. Sīlabyasanaṃ dukkhanti sīlassa byasanaṃ sīlabyasanaṃ, dussīlyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vuttanayena taṃ sīlabyasanaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti. Sammādiṭṭhiṃ vināsayamānā uppannā diṭṭhiyeva byasanaṃ diṭṭhibyasanaṃ, vuttanayena taṃ diṭṭhibyasanaṃ dukkhaṃ anveti. Ettha ca purimāni dve anipphannāni, pacchimāni tīṇi nipphannāni tilakkhaṇāhatāni. Purimāni ca tīṇi neva kusalāni nākusalāni. Sīladiṭṭhibyasanadvayaṃ akusalaṃ.
“如同”是指譬喻里说的。“破船”是指绑绳松了的船,或者已经朽坏、木板脱落的船。“让水进入的”是指进水、漏水的地方。“水从那里那里跟着来”是指水从各个破损的地方渗进来。“前面也”是指船的前部,“后面也”是指船的后部,“下面也”是指船底,“侧面也”是指船的两侧。中间没有说到的部分,应该按照文句的顺序去理解。巴利
Yathāti opamme. Bhinnaṃ nāvanti sithilabandhanaṃ nāvaṃ, jajjarībhūtaṃ vā padarugghāṭimaṃ vā. Dakamesinti udakadāyiṃ udakappavesaniṃ. Tato tato udakaṃ anvetīti tato tato bhinnaṭṭhānato udakaṃ pavisati. Puratopīti nāvāya purimabhāgatopi. Pacchatopīti tassā pacchimabhāgatopi. Heṭṭhatopīti adhobhāgatopi. Passatopīti ubhayapassatopi. Yaṃ antarantarā na vuttaṃ, taṃ pāṭhānusārena veditabbaṃ.
因此,修行者要通过修身至念等修习,始终具足正念,以镇伏和断除两种方式,在色等事欲上回避一切种类的烦恼欲,从而回避诸欲。这样,他舍弃了那些欲之后,就以能断除那些欲的道,渡过四种瀑流,能够超越它们。然后,就像一个人把重船里的水舀出去,让船变轻之后,毫不费力地到达彼岸、去到对岸一样;同样,他把自身这艘船里烦恼之水带来的沉重舀出去,以轻快的自身到达彼岸。他应成为到达一切法之彼岸——涅槃的人,也就是通过证得阿罗汉果,以无余涅槃界而般涅槃。世尊以阿罗汉果为顶峰,结束了这次教导。巴利
Tasmā kāyagatāsatiādibhāvanāya jantu, sadā sato hutvā vikkhambhanasamucchedavasena rūpādīsu vatthukāmesu sabbappakārampi kilesakāmaṃ parivajjento kāmāni parivajjeyya. Evaṃ te kāme pahāya tappahānakaramaggeneva catubbidhampi oghaṃ tareyya tarituṃ sakkuṇeyya. Tato yathā puriso garukaṃ nāvaṃ udakaṃ siñcitvā lahukāya nāvāya appakasireneva pāragū bhaveyya pāraṃ gaccheyya, evamevaṃ attabhāvanāvaṃ kilesūdakagarukaṃ siñcitvā lahukena attabhāvena pāragū bhaveyya. Sabbadhammapāraṃ nibbānaṃ gato bhaveyya, arahattappattiyā gaccheyya anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbānenāti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
所谓“因此”,是因为以生为首的苦跟随这个人,所以说是“因此”。“因此之故”“以此因”等也是同样的理解方式。因为所说的这种苦跟随他,所以这是他的因;因为跟随他,所以这是他的缘;因为跟随他,所以这是他的本源——应该这样连接词句。“因”等词是原因的同义词。因为以它为因,它的果才产生、生起,所以叫因。因为缘于它,果才生起、生起,所以叫缘。就像指示说“来,抓住它”一样,它把自己的果安置出来,所以叫本源。巴利
Tasmāti yasmā jātiādikaṃ dukkhaṃ etaṃ puggalaṃ anveti, tasmā. Taṃkāraṇā taṃhetūtiādīsupi eseva nayo. Yasmā vuttappakāradukkhaṃ etaṃ anveti, taṃhetu. Yasmā anveti tappaccayā, yasmā anveti taṃnidānanti evaṃ padayojanā kātabbā. Hetūtiādīni kāraṇavevacanāni. Kāraṇañhi tena tassa phalaṃ hinoti pavattatīti hetu. Taṃ taṃ paṭicca phalaṃ eti pavattatīti paccayo. ‘‘Handa naṃ gaṇhathā’’ti dassentaṃ viya attano phalaṃ nidetīti nidānaṃ.
有些论师这样解释:“‘因此之故’,是为了否定无因和无理由。‘以此因’,是为了否定无因和以四大种为因。‘以此为缘’,是为了连同非缘一起否定不共缘。‘以此为本源’,是为了连同非本源一起否定传承本源和证得本源。”所谓“如此见到过患”,是指以观智如实、清楚地见到上述那类灾患。巴利
‘‘Taṃkāraṇāti akāraṇanikkāraṇapaṭisedho. Taṃhetūti ahetumahābhūtahetupaṭisedho. Tappaccayāti appaccayena saddhiṃ asādhāraṇapaccayapaṭisedho . Taṃnidānāti anidānena saha āgamādhigamanidānapaṭisedho’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti. Etaṃ ādīnavaṃ sampassamānoti etaṃ vuttappakāraṃ upaddavaṃ vipassanāñāṇena sammā passamāno dakkhamāno.
Sadā 是词根。再次出现的 sadā 是释义词。Sadā 指每一天;sabbadā 指一切时候;sabbakāla 指上午等一切时段;niccakāla 指日复一日;dhuvakāla 指不间断的时段;satata 指没有间隙;samita 指成为一体;abbokiṇṇa 指不和其他东西混杂;poṅkhānupoṅkha 指按顺序紧密相连,就像“相续无间、没有错失地现前”等(相应部5.1115)。udakūmikajātaṃ 指如已生起的水波波浪一般;avīci 指无间隔;santati 指无中断;sahita 指紧密相连或成为一体,如“sahitaṃ me, asahitaṃ te”等(长部1.202)中那样;phassita 指触及,如“nivāte phusitaggale”等中那样;purebhattaṃ pacchābhattaṃ 是依白天时段的划分而说的两个词;purimaṃ yāmaṃ majjhimaṃ yāmaṃ pacchimaṃ yāmaṃ 是依夜晚时段的划分而说的三个词;kāḷe juṇhe 是依半月而说;vasse…pe… gimhe 是依季节而说的三个词;purime vayokhandhe…pe… pacchime vayokhandhe 是依年龄阶段的划分而说的三个词,应当如此了知。巴利
Sadāti mūlapadaṃ. Puna sadāti atthapadaṃ. Sadāti sabbadivase. Sabbadāti sabbasmiṃ kāle. Sabbakālanti pubbaṇhādisabbakālaṃ. Niccakālanti divase divase. Dhuvakālanti abbocchinnakālaṃ. Satatanti nirantaraṃ. Samitanti ekībhūtaṃ. Abbokiṇṇanti aññena asammissaṃ. Poṅkhānupoṅkhanti paṭipāṭiyā ghaṭitaṃ ‘‘poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ avirādhitaṃ upaṭṭhātī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.1115) viya. Udakūmikajātanti nibbattaudakaūmitaraṅgaṃ viya. Avīcīti aviraḷaṃ. Santatīti anupacchinnaṃ. Sahitanti ghaṭitaṃ ekībhūtaṃ vā ‘‘sahitaṃ me, asahitaṃ te’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.202) viya. Phassitanti phusitaṃ ‘‘nivāte phusitaggale’’tiādīsu viya. Purebhattaṃ pacchābhattanti dve padāni divākālavibhāgavasena. Purimaṃ yāmaṃ majjhimaṃ yāmaṃ pacchimaṃ yāmanti tīṇi rattivibhāgavasena. Kāḷe juṇheti aḍḍhamāsavasena. Vasse…pe… gimheti tīṇi utuvasena. Purime vayokhandhe…pe… pacchime vayokhandheti tīṇi vayovibhāgavasena vuttānīti ñātabbaṃ.
“具念”是因为四种原因而称为具念。像“于身修习身随观念住者,为具念”等,直到“如此以断除的方式回避诸欲”为止的语句,其含义已如前说。再者,也可以从七种状态来说名为具念:即在三种所依上,以七种状态;或者以能令三种烦恼退去的能力,由有念而名为具念。由已寂静故:即舍弃烦恼与随烦恼后,以住立与所缘而解脱,因此由已寂静而名为具念。由已平息故:即与能施可爱果的功德及能施不可爱果的恶业相平息,因此由已平息而名为具念。具足寂静法:即亲近善士之法、承事佛陀等圣者,因此由具足寂静法而名为具念。巴利
Satoti catūhi kāraṇehi sato. ‘‘Kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvento sato’’tiādīni ‘‘evaṃ samucchedato kāme parivajjeyyā’’ti pariyosānāni vuttatthāneva. Api ca sattattā satoti tīsu vatthūsu sattabhāvena vā tayo kilese paṭikkamāpetuṃ sattibhāvena vā satattā sato. Santattāti kilesopakkilese palāpetvā ṭhānena ca ārammaṇena ca pamocetvā santattā sato. Samitattāti iṭṭhaphaladāyakapuññena ca aniṭṭhaphaladāyakapāpena ca samitattā sato. Santadhammasamannāgatoti sappurisadhamme bhajanato buddhādiariyapuggale sevanato santadhammasamannāgatattā sato.
“遍知事欲”是指:对上面说的这类属于三地的事欲,以审察遍知而了知。“舍弃”是指:以断遍知而舍弃烦恼欲。“舍断”就是扔掉。难道像用簸箕倒垃圾那样吗?不是的,而是要把它驱散、越过、击碎、清除出去。难道像用刺棒赶牛那样吗?不是的,而是要把它彻底灭掉、让它完全消失。要做到内部一点也不剩,哪怕像碎片那么一点都不留,就这样去做。那么怎样才算“就这样去做”呢?就是取它的不存在,使它归于不存在。也就是以彻底断除的方式来断,让它像被连根斩断一样,这样去做——这就是这句话的意思。这个道理也适用于欲贪盖等。巴利
Vatthukāme parijānitvāti ete vuttappakāre tebhūmake vatthukāme tīraṇapariññāya jānitvā. Pahāyāti kilesakāme pahānapariññāya pariccajitvā. Pajahitvāti chaḍḍetvā. Kiṃ kacavaraṃ viya piṭakenāti? Na hi, api ca kho taṃ vinodetvā taritvā vijjhitvā nīharitvā. Kiṃ balibaddamiva patodenāti ? Na hi, atha kho taṃ byantiṃ karitvā vigatantaṃ karitvā. Yathāssa antopi nāvasissati, antamaso bhaṅgamattampi, tathā taṃ karitvā. Kathaṃ pana taṃ tathā katanti? Anabhāvaṃ gahetvā anu abhāvaṃ gametvā. Samucchedappahānena yathā samucchinnā hoti, tathā karitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo kāmacchandanīvaraṇādīsu.
在“欲流”等说法中,对五种欲乐的贪爱,因为具有使人沉没的含义,所以称为“欲流”。“有流”是指对色界有和无色界有的欲贪,以及对禅那的贪爱。“见流”是指与常见等见解一起生起的对存在的希求,这见流其实归入有流之中。“无明流”是指对四圣谛的无知。在这里,如果作意欲乐为乐味,那么尚未生起的欲流就会生起,已经生起的欲流就会增长;如果作意广大法为乐味,那么尚未生起的有流就会生起,已经生起的有流就会增长;以三地诸法作为四种颠倒的所缘和依止,那么尚未生起的无明流就会生起,已经生起的无明流就会增长——应当这样了知。按照所说内容的相反面,就可以展开说明善法方面。巴利
Kāmoghantiādīsu pañcakāmaguṇikarāgo avasīdanaṭṭhena ‘‘kāmogho’’ti vuccati. Bhavoghoti rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti ca. Diṭṭhoghoti sassatadiṭṭhādisahagatā bhave patthanāyeva, diṭṭhogho bhavoghe eva samodhānaṃ gacchati. Avijjogho catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃ. Tattha kāmaguṇe assādato manasi karoto anuppanno ca kāmogho uppajjati, uppanno ca kāmogho saṃvaḍḍhati. Mahaggatadhamme assādato manasi karoto anuppanno ca bhavogho uppajjati, uppanno ca saṃvaḍḍhati. Tebhūmakadhammesu catuvipallāsapadaṭṭhānabhāvena anuppanno ca avijjogho uppajjati, uppanno ca saṃvaḍḍhatīti veditabbo. Vuttanayapaccanīkato sukkapakkho vitthāretabbo.
修习无愿解脱的人,能渡过欲流;修习无相解脱的人,能渡过有流;修习空解脱的人,则能渡过无明流。以初道能渡过,以第二道能越过,以第三道能度到彼岸,以第四道能完全超越,以果能彻底越过。或者,有些人这样解释:以欲流能渡过,以有流能越过,以见流能度到彼岸,以无明流能完全超越,以一切流能彻底越过。巴利
Appaṇihitavimokkhaṃ paṭipanno kāmoghaṃ, animittavimokkhaṃ paṭipanno bhavoghaṃ, suññatavimokkhaṃ paṭipanno avijjoghañca tareyya. Paṭhamamaggavasena tareyya, dutiyamaggavasena uttareyya, tatiyamaggavasena patareyya, catutthamaggavasena samatikkameyya, phalavasena vītivatteyyāti. Atha vā ‘‘kāmoghavasena tareyya, bhavoghavasena uttareyya, diṭṭhoghavasena patareyya, avijjoghavasena samatikkameyya, sabboghavasena vītivatteyyā’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
“重”就是不轻。“有重担”是指在这里放置货物行李的状态。“洒了水”就是倒了水。“倾泻”就是洒得过多。“丢弃”就是倒掉。“以轻快”就是以轻便。“迅速”就是快速。“轻快”就是在那一刹那。“几乎不费力”就是毫无辛苦。被称为“彼岸”的是不死、涅槃:相对于有身见的此岸,它成了彼岸。涅槃也被说为从渴爱之林出来的。所谓“那位”,就是那一位。“一切行寂止”等语,全部都是指涅槃。因为依靠它,一切行的躁动都平息、止静,所以称为“一切行寂止”。又因为依靠它,一切依着都被舍离,一切渴爱都灭尽,一切烦恼尘垢都离染,一切苦都息灭,所以称为“一切依着的舍离、渴爱灭尽、离染、灭”。至于那种渴爱,以有而向有,或与果一起令业弯曲、缠结,因此称为“林”;从这林中出来,就是“出林”,也就是涅槃。他应到彼岸:以取相的方式,以从一边出来的种姓智,到达涅槃彼岸。他应证得:以取相活动的两边出离之道智,特别到达涅槃彼岸。他应触证:以涅槃为所缘的果心方式,触证涅槃彼岸。他应作证:以功德方式触证后,以省察智使涅槃彼岸成为现前。或者,有些人这样解释:“以初道到彼岸,以第二道证得,以第三道触证,以第四道作证。”凡是想去彼岸的人:任何站在观智上的人,想要去涅槃彼岸,他也必定会去到那里,所以是“到彼岸者”。确实这样说:“我被生、老、死、愁、悲、苦、忧、恼所淹没”等等。在前期,由于意乐和观智相应,他也称为到彼岸者。凡正在去彼岸的人:凡具备道而正去涅槃彼岸的人,也称为到彼岸者。凡已去彼岸的人:凡已以道完成作用、立于果中、已到达涅槃彼岸的人,也称为到彼岸者。巴利
Garukanti na sallahukaṃ. Bhārikanti bhārabhaṇḍaṃ ettha ṭhapayantīti bhārikaṃ. Udakaṃ sitvāti udakaṃ siñcitvā. Osiñcitvāti atirekaṃ siñcitvā. Chaḍḍetvāti pātetvā. Lahukāyāti sallahukāya. Khippanti sīghaṃ. Lahunti taṃkhaṇaṃ. Appakasirenevāti nidukkheneva. Pāraṃ vuccati amataṃ nibbānanti sakkāyaorato pārabhūtaṃ pāraṃ. Taṇhāvānato nikkhantaṃ nibbānaṃ kathīyati. Yosoti yo eso. Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbaṃ nibbānameva. Yasmā hi taṃ āgamma sabbasaṅkhāravipphanditāni samanti vūpasamanti, tasmā ‘‘sabbasaṅkhārasamatho’’ti vuccati. Yasmā cetaṃ āgamma sabbe upadhayo paṭinissaṭṭhā honti, sabbā taṇhā khīyanti, sabbe kilesarajjā virajjanti, sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, tasmā ‘‘sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo, taṇhakkhayo, virāgo, nirodho’’ti vuccati. Yā panesā taṇhā bhavena bhavaṃ, phalena vā saddhiṃ kammaṃ vinati saṃsibbatīti katvā vānanti vuccati, tato nikkhantaṃ vānatoti nibbānaṃ. Pāraṃ gaccheyya nimittavasena ekato vuṭṭhānagotrabhuñāṇena nibbānapāraṃ pāpuṇeyya. Adhigaccheyya nimittapavattehi ubhatovuṭṭhānamaggañāṇena nibbānapāraṃ visesena pāpuṇeyya. Phuseyya nibbānārammaṇaphalacittavasena nibbānapāraṃ phuseyya. Sacchikareyya guṇavasena phusitvā paccavekkhaṇañāṇena nibbānapāraṃ paccakkhaṃ kareyya. Atha vā ‘‘paṭhamamaggena pāraṃ gaccheyya, dutiyena adhigaccheyya, tatiyena phuseyya, catutthena sacchi kareyyā’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti. Yopi pāraṃ gantukāmoti yo koci vipassanāñāṇe ṭhito puggalo nibbānapāraṃ gantukāmo, sopi avassaṃ tattha gamissatīti pāragū. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘otiṇṇomhi jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehī’’tiādi . Pubbabhāge ajjhāsayavasena vipassanāyogena ca, sopi pāragū nāma. Yopi pāraṃ gacchatīti yopi maggasamaṅgī nibbānapāraṃ gacchati, sopi pāragū nāma. Yopi pāraṃ gatoti yopi maggena kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā phale ṭhito nibbānapāraṅgato, sopi pāragū nāma.
为了用佛陀的话来说明这一点,他接着说:“世尊也确实这样说过:已渡脱、已到达彼岸的婆罗门,站在干地上。”等等。
“以证智到达彼岸者”:他想以已经证得的智慧,通过知遍知而到达涅槃彼岸,正在到达,或者已经到达,所以叫“到达彼岸者”。
“以遍知到达彼岸者”:以对一切法的审察遍知完全超越之后,按照上面说的方式到达彼岸。
“以断舍到达彼岸者”:以对属于集这一方的烦恼的断遍知完全超越之后,按照上面说的方式到达彼岸。
因为凡是遍知一切法的人,都是以三种遍知来遍知的:知遍知、审察遍知、断遍知。
其中,什么是知遍知?就是了知一切法:“这些是内的,这些是外的,这是它的特相,这些是它的作用、现起、近因。”这就是知遍知。
什么是审察遍知?这样了知之后,以可证得的方式审察一切法:“以无常、以苦、以病……”等等,这就是审察遍知。
什么是断遍知?这样审察之后,以最上之道在诸法中舍断欲贪,这就是断遍知。
针对这三种遍知,所以说:“他以证智到达彼岸、以遍知到达彼岸、以断舍到达彼岸。”巴利
Taṃ jinavacanena dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttampi hetaṃ bhagavatā – tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇo’’tiādimāha. Abhiññāpāragūti adhigatena ñāṇena ñātapariññāya nibbānapāraṃ gantukāmo gacchati, gatoti pāragū. Pariññāpāragūti sabbadhammānaṃ tīraṇapariññāya samatikkamitvā vuttanayena pāragū. Pahānapāragūti samudayapakkhikānaṃ kilesānaṃ pahānapariññāya samatikkamitvā vuttanayena pāragū. Yo hi sabbadhammaṃ parijānāti, so tīhi pariññāhi parijānāti ñātapariññāya tīraṇapariññāya pahānapariññāyāti. Tattha katamā ñātapariññā? Sabbadhammaṃ jānāti ‘‘ime ajjhattikā, ime bāhirā, idamassa lakkhaṇaṃ, imāni rasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānī’’ti, ayaṃ ñātapariññā. Katamā tīraṇapariññā? Evaṃ ñātaṃ katvā labbhamānavasena sabbadhammaṃ tīreti ‘‘aniccato dukkhato rogato’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.122), ayaṃ tīraṇapariññā. Katamā pahānapariññā? Evaṃ tīrayitvā aggamaggena dhammesu chandarāgaṃ pajahati, ayaṃ pahānapariññāti. Imā pariññāyo sandhāya ‘‘so abhiññāpāragū pariññāpāragū pahānapāragū’’ti āha.
修习到彼岸:通过修习达到顶点,依着道而到达涅槃彼岸。作证到彼岸:依着果与涅槃,到达所证之果与涅槃的彼岸。等至到彼岸:到达了八种等至的彼岸。一切法:指五蕴等一切法。一切苦:指生苦等一切苦。一切烦恼:指身恶行等一切烦恼。圣道:指入流道等四种圣道。灭:指涅槃。一切等至:指所有八种色界与无色界等至。他:就是那位圣者。到达自在者:达到了自在的状态。或者说,达到了可爱、自在、已成就的状态。到达究竟者:所谓究竟,意思是终点、完结,或者最上的状态,他达到了那个状态。在哪里到达?回答说“在圣戒中”等等。其中,在圣戒中:在无过失的戒中。在圣定中:在无过失的定中。以圣慧:以无过失的慧。以圣解脱:以无过失的果解脱。应当知道:第一句摄取了正语、正业与正命,第二句摄取了正精进、正念与正定,第三句摄取了正思惟与正见,第四句摄取了与它们相应的其余诸法。巴利
Bhāvanāpāragūti bhāvanāya koṭiṃ patvā maggavasena nibbānapāraṃ gato. Sacchikiriyāpāragūti phalanibbānavasena sacchi kiriyāphalanibbānapāraṃ gato. Samāpattipāragūti aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ pāraṃ patto. Sabbadhammānanti pañcakkhandhādisabbadhammānaṃ. Sabbadukkhānanti jātidukkhādisabbadukkhānaṃ. Sabbakilesānanti kāyaduccaritādisabbakilesānaṃ. Ariyamaggānanti sotāpattimaggādicatunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ . Nirodhassāti nibbānassa. Sabbasamāpattīnanti sabbāsampi aṭṭhannaṃ rūpārūpasamāpattīnaṃ. Soti so ariyo. Vasippattoti vasībhāvappatto. Atha vā kantabhāvaṃ issariyabhāvaṃ nipphannabhāvaṃ patto. Pāramippattoti pāramīti avasānaṃ niṭṭhānaṃ, uttamabhāvaṃ vā taṃ patto. Kattha pattoti āha ‘‘ariyasmiṃ sīlasmi’’ntiādi. Tattha ariyasmiṃ sīlasminti niddose sīlasmiṃ. Ariyasmiṃ samādhisminti niddose samādhismiṃ. Ariyāya paññāyāti niddosāya paññāya. Ariyāya vimuttiyāti niddosāya phalavimuttiyā. Purimena vācākammantājīvā gahitā, dutiyena vāyāmasatisamādhayo gahitā, tatiyena vitakkasammādiṭṭhiyo gahitā, catutthena taṃsampayuttā sesadhammā gahitāti veditabbā.
到达尽头:通过道,到达了行的世间尽头。到达尽端:通过果,到达了同一个世间尽头。到达顶点:通过道,到达了行的顶点。到达顶端:通过果,到达了同一个顶点。到达边际:通过道,把蕴、处等世间的边际、界限、范围作为终点而到达。到达边限:通过果,把同一个世间作为边际而到达。到达终点:通过道,到达了终点。到达终末:通过果,到达了终点。到达庇护:通过道,到达了庇护。到达庇护:通过果,到达了庇护。到达窟宅:通过道,到达了隐藏处。到达窟宅:通过果,到达了那个隐藏处。到达皈依:通过道,到达了安立处。到达皈依:通过果,到达了皈依。到达无畏:通过道,到达了无怖畏处。到达无畏:通过果,到达了无怖畏的涅槃。到达不动:通过道,到达了离死的涅槃。到达不动:通过果,到达了那个涅槃。到达不死:通过道,到达了无死的涅槃。到达不死:通过果,到达了那个涅槃。到达涅槃:通过道,到达了出离渴爱之林的涅槃。到达涅槃:通过果,到达了同一个涅槃。已出起而住者:那位阿拉汉在十种圣住中已住、已遍住、已出起,也正在出起,所以称为已出起而住者。已修习行者:以戒一起,在八种等至中已修习而住,所以称为已修习行者。已走完旅途者:已经超越了轮回的旅途。已到达方向者:连梦中都不曾到过的涅槃方向,他已经到达了。已到达终点者:已经到达无余涅槃的终点而安住。已守护梵行者:梵行已被守护。已得最上见者:已经获得了最上的正见。已通达不动者:已经通达不动、不摇动的阿拉汉果而安住。已证得灭者:已经证得灭、涅槃而安住。巴利
Antagatoti maggena saṅkhāralokantaṃ gato. Antappattoti tameva lokantaṃ phalena patto. Koṭigatoti maggena saṅkhārakoṭiṃ gato. Koṭippattoti tameva koṭiṃ phalena patto. Pariyantagatoti maggena khandhāyatanādilokapariyantaṃ paricchedaṃ parivaṭumaṃ katvā gato. Pariyantappattoti tameva lokaṃ phalena pariyantaṃ katvā patto. Vosānagatoti maggena avasānaṃ gato. Vosānappattoti phalena avasānaṃ patto. Tāṇagatoti maggena tāyanaṃ gato. Tāṇappattoti phalena tāyanaṃ patto. Leṇagatoti maggena nilīyanaṃ gato. Leṇappattoti taṃ phalena nilīyanaṃ patto. Saraṇagatoti maggena patiṭṭhaṃ gato. Saraṇappattoti phalena saraṇaṃ patto . Abhayagatoti maggena nibbhayaṃ gato. Abhayappattoti phalena nibbhayaṃ nibbānaṃ patto. Accutagatoti cutivirahitaṃ nibbānaṃ maggena gato. Accutappattoti taṃ phalena patto. Amatagatoti maraṇarahitaṃ nibbānaṃ maggena gato. Amatappattoti taṃ phalena patto. Nibbānagatoti taṇhāvānato nikkhantaṃ nibbānaṃ maggena gato. Nibbānappattoti tameva phalena patto. Sovuṭṭhavāsoti so arahā dasasu ariyavāsesu vasi parivasi vuṭṭho vuṭṭhāti ca vuṭṭhavāso. Ciṇṇacaraṇoti sīlena saha aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu ciṇṇavasīti ciṇṇacaraṇo. Gataddhoti saṃsāraddhānaṃ atikkanto. Gatadisoti supinantenapi agatapubbaṃ nibbānadisaṃ gato. Gatakoṭikoti anupādisesanibbānakoṭiṃ gato hutvā ṭhito. Pālitabrahmacariyoti rakkhitabrahmacariyo. Uttamadiṭṭhippattoti uttamaṃ sammādiṭṭhiṃ patto. Paṭividdhākuppoti akuppaṃ acalanaṃ arahattaphalaṃ paṭivijjhitvā ṭhito. Sacchikatanirodhoti nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikatvā ṭhito.
他的苦已被遍知:三种苦已被他超越并彻底限定。应被证知:应以通达自性特相的方式,以清净的行相了知。已证知:以增上的智慧了知。应被遍知:应以通达共相的方式,并通过完成作用,周遍地遍知。已遍知:已从一切方面了知。应修习:应令其增长。应作证:应亲自证得。作证确实有两种:得作证和所缘作证。巴利
Dukkhaṃ tassa pariññātanti tividhaṃ dukkhaṃ tena samatikkamitvā paricchinnaṃ. Abhiññeyyanti sabhāvalakkhaṇāvabodhavasena sobhanena ākārena jānitabbaṃ. Abhiññātanti adhikena ñāṇena ñātaṃ. Pariññeyyanti sāmaññalakkhaṇāvabodhavasena kiccasamāpannavasena ca byāpitvā parijānitabbaṃ. Pariññātanti samantato ñātaṃ. Bhāvetabbanti vaḍḍhetabbaṃ. Sacchikātabbanti paccakkhaṃ kātabbaṃ. Duvidhā hi sacchikiriyā paṭilābhasacchikiriyā ārammaṇasacchikiriyā cāti.
这里,“门闩”指的是作为轮回根源的无明。因为它会让人痛苦,所以称为“门闩”。由于他已经把无明拔掉,所以说他是“已拔掉门闩的人”。“填平沟堑的人”:“沟堑”指的是带来后有、让众生在诸有中以投生和流转的方式不断轮回、因而被称为“生轮回”的后有诸蕴之因,也就是业行造作。因为它一次次让人受生,像壕沟一样把人围住,所以称为“沟堑”。由于他已经把这条沟堑填平、打散,所以说他是“填平沟堑的人”。“已拔掉柱子的人”:“柱子”指的是作为轮回根源的渴爱。因为它深深潜入,所以称为“柱子”。由于他已经把柱子拔掉、连根拔起并丢弃,所以说他是“已拔掉柱子的人”。“无门闩的人”:“门闩”指的是能产生下分结的诸下分结,它们是招感欲有出生的因缘。因为它们像大城门一样,使心关闭而住立,所以称为“门闩”。由于他已经没有门闩、已经破坏门闩,所以说他是“无门闩的人”。“圣者”指的是无烦恼、清净者。“已放下旗帜的人”指的是已经放下、打倒我慢之旗的人。“已卸下重担的人”:蕴担、烦恼担、行作担、五欲功德担已经卸下、放下,所以是“已卸下重担的人”。此外,这里因为已经卸下我慢之担,所以特指为“已卸下重担的人”。“已解脱离系的人”:已经从四种轭和一切烦恼中解脱离系。但这里因为已经从我慢之轭中解脱离系,所以特指为“已解脱离系的人”。巴利
Ukkhittapalighoti ettha palighoti vaṭṭamūlikā avijjā. Ayañhi dukkhipanaṭṭhena ‘‘paligho’’ti vuccati. Tenesa tassā ukkhittattā ‘‘ukkhittapaligho’’ti vutto. Saṃkiṇṇaparikhoti parikhā vuccati punabbhavadāyako bhavesu jāyanavasena ceva saṃsaraṇavasena ca ‘‘jātisaṃsāro’’ti laddhanāmānaṃ punabbhavakkhandhānaṃ paccayo kammābhisaṅkhāro. So hi punappunaṃ uppattikaraṇavasena parikkhipitvā ṭhitattā ‘‘parikhā’’ti vuccati. Tenesa tassā saṃkiṇṇattā vikiṇṇattā ‘‘saṃkiṇṇaparikho’’ti vutto. Abbūḷhesikoti esikāti vaṭṭamūlikā taṇhā. Ayañhi gambhīrānugataṭṭhena ‘‘esikā’’ti vuccati. Tenesa tassā abbūḷhattā luñcitvā chaḍḍitattā ‘‘abbūḷhesiko’’ti vuccati. Niraggaḷoti aggaḷaṃ vuccanti orambhāgajanakāni kāmabhave uppattipaccayāni orambhāgiyāni. Etāni hi mahākavāṭaṃ viya nagaradvāraṃ cittaṃ pidahitvā ṭhitattā ‘‘aggaḷa’’nti vuccanti . Tenesa tesaṃ niraggaḷattā bhinnattā ‘‘niraggaḷo’’ti vutto. Ariyoti nikkileso parisuddho. Pannaddhajoti pātitamānaddhajo. Pannabhāroti khandhabhārakilesabhāraabhisaṅkhārabhārapañcakāmaguṇabhārā pannā oropitā assāti pannabhāro. Api ca idha mānabhārasseva oropitattā ‘‘pannabhāro’’ti adhippeto. Visaṃyuttoti catūhi yogehi sabbakilesehi ca visaṃyutto. Idha pana mānayogeneva visaṃyuttattā ‘‘visaṃyutto’’ti adhippeto.
到这里,已经说明了这位长老通过圣道断尽烦恼、证得漏尽、安住于最殊胜的寂灭之床以后,以涅槃为所缘,入果定而安住的情形。就像有两座城:一座是贼城,一座是安稳城。这时,一位大勇士心里生起这样的想法:“只要这座贼城还在,安稳城就摆脱不了威胁。我要把贼城彻底摧毁。”于是他披上铠甲,拿起利剑,来到贼城,用剑砍断城门上竖立的桩柱,连同门框一起击破门扇,拔起门闩,拆毁城墙,填平壕沟,推倒那些为了装饰城市而竖起的旗帜,放火烧掉整座城,然后进入安稳城,登上高楼,在亲族的围绕下享用美味佳肴。同样,贼城好比自身,安稳城好比涅槃,大勇士好比修行者。修行者这样想:“只要自身的轮回还存在,就逃不开三十二种业行逼迫、九十八种疾病和二十五种大怖畏。”于是,他像那位大勇士一样,披上戒的铠甲,拿起锐利的慧剑,用这把剑——就像用阿罗汉道——斩断渴爱的桩柱,就像那位勇士连同门框一起击破城门一样,打开五下分结的门闩,就像那位勇士拔起门闩一样,拔起无明的门闩,就像那位勇士拆毁城墙、填平壕沟一样,拆毁业行的城墙,填平生死的壕沟,就像那位勇士推倒那些为了装饰城市而竖起的旗帜一样,推倒我慢的旗帜,烧毁自身这座城,就像那位勇士进入安稳城、登上高楼享用美味佳肴一样,进入涅槃之城,体验以不死寂灭为所缘的果定之乐,度过时光。世尊确实这样说过(《增支部》5.71)——巴利
Ettāvatā therena maggena kilese khepetvā nirodhasayanavaragatassa khīṇāsavassa nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā viharaṇakālo dassito. Yathā hi dve nagarāni ekaṃ coranagaraṃ, ekaṃ khemanagaraṃ. Atha ekassa mahāyodhassa evaṃ icchā uppajjeyya ‘‘yāvimaṃ coranagaraṃ tiṭṭhati, tāva khemanagaraṃ bhayato na muccati. Coranagaraṃ anagaraṃ karissāmī’’ti sannāhaṃ katvā khaggaṃ gahetvā coranagaraṃ upasaṅkamitvā nagaradvāre ussāpite esikatthambhe khaggena chinditvā saddhiṃ dvārabāhāhi kavāṭaṃ bhinditvā palighaṃ ukkhipitvā pākāraṃ bhindanto parikhaṃ saṃkiritvā nagarasobhanatthāya ussāpite dhaje pātetvā nagaraṃ agginā jhāpetvā khemanagaraṃ pavisitvā uparipāsādamāruyha ñātigaṇaparivuto surasabhojanaṃ bhuñjeyya. Evaṃ coranagaraṃ viya sakkāyo, khemanagaraṃ viya nibbānaṃ, mahāyodho viya yogāvacaro. Tassevaṃ hoti ‘‘yāva sakkāyavaṭṭaṃ vaṭṭati, tāva dvattiṃsakammakāraṇehi aṭṭhanavutirogehi pañcavīsatimahabbhayehi ca parimuccanaṃ natthī’’ti. So mahāyodho viya sannāhaṃ sīlasannāhaṃ katvā paññātiṇhakhaggaṃ gahetvā khaggena esikatthambhe viya arahattamaggena taṇhesikaṃ chinditvā, so yodho sadvārabāhakaṃ nagarakavāṭaṃ viya pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanaggaḷaṃ ugghoṭetvā, so yodho palighaṃ viya avijjāpalighaṃ ukkhipitvā, so yodho pākāraṃ bhindanto parikhaṃ viya kammābhisaṅkhārapākāraṃ bhindanto jātisaṃsāraparikhaṃ saṃkiritvā, so yodho nagarasobhanatthāya ussāpite dhaje viya mānaddhaje pātetvā sakkāyanagaraṃ jhāpetvā, so yodho khemanagaraṃ pavisitvā uparipāsāde surasabhojanaṃ bhuñjanto viya nibbānanagaraṃ pavisitvā amatanirodhārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ anubhavamāno kālaṃ vītināmeti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā (a. ni. 5.71) –
“诸比丘,比丘如何是已拔除门闩者?在此法中,比丘的无明已断尽,连根拔除,如截断的多罗树头,归于非有,未来不再生起。诸比丘,比丘如此便是已拔除门闩者。”巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ukkhittapaligho hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno avijjā pahīnā hoti ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṃkatā āyatiṃ anuppādadhammā. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ukkhittapaligho hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才是“填平沟堑”呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘已经断除了会导致再来投生的生死轮回……(中略)……比丘们,这样,比丘就是“填平沟堑”。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saṃkiṇṇaparikho hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ponobhaviko jātisaṃsāro pahīno hoti…pe… evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saṃkiṇṇaparikho hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才是已拔门柱者呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘的渴爱已被断除……(中略)……比丘们,这样,比丘就是已拔门柱者。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu abbūḷhesiko hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno taṇhā pahīnā hoti…pe… evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu abbūḷhesiko hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才是“无门闩者”呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘已经断除了五下分结……(中略)……比丘们,这样,比丘就是“无门闩者”。巴利
‘‘Kathañca , bhikkhave, bhikkhu niraggaḷo hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno pañcorambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni pahīnāni honti…pe… evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu niraggaḷo hoti.
比丘们,比丘怎样才是圣洁者、降旗者、卸下重担者、离结者呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘的我慢已被断除,根已斩断,像截断的多罗树桩一样,已不存在,未来不会再产生。比丘们,这样,比丘就是圣洁者、降旗者、卸下重担者、离结者。巴利
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ariyo pannaddhajo pannabhāro visaṃyutto hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno asmimāno pahīno hoti ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṃkato āyatiṃ anuppādadhammo. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ariyo pannaddhajo pannabhāro visaṃyutto hoti (a. ni. 5.71).
比丘们,对于这样拥有解脱心的比丘,包括帝释天、梵天和生主在内的诸天人,到处寻找,都找不到如来的识依止于此。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ vimuttacittaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuṃ saindā devā sabrahmakā sapajāpatikā anvesaṃ nādhigacchanti ‘idaṃnissitaṃ tathāgatassa viññāṇa’’’nti (ma. ni. 1.246).
已舍离五支:就是通过种种方法断除了欲贪等五支之后而安住。因为这样说:巴利
Pañcaṅgavippahīnoti kāmacchandādipañcaṅgāni vividhehi upāyehi pajahitvā ṭhito. Vuttañhetaṃ –
贤友,比丘怎样才是已断除五支的呢?贤友,在这里,比丘已经断除了欲贪,已经断除了嗔恚,已经断除了昏沉睡眠,已经断除了掉举恶作,已经断除了疑。贤友,比丘这样就是已断除五支的。巴利
‘‘Kathañcāvuso , bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāmacchando pahīno hoti, byāpādo pahīno hoti, thinamiddhaṃ pahīnaṃ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīnaṃ hoti, vicikicchā pahīnā hoti. Evaṃ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348, 360).
所谓“具足六支”,意思是:圆满六支。在六个根门面对色等所缘时,避开排斥和贪著,以舍心而具念、具正知地安住;由于这样安住而圆满六支、使之完备,所以说“具足六支”。确实有这样的说法:巴利
Chaḷaṅgasamannāgatoti channaṃ aṅgānaṃ pūretvā chasu dvāresu rūpādiārammaṇe paṭighānunayaṃ vajjetvā upekkhāvasena sato sampajāno hutvā viharaṇavasena chaḷaṅgāni pūretvā paripuṇṇaṃ katvā ṭhitattā ‘‘chaḷaṅgasamannāgato’’ti vutto. Vuttañhetaṃ –
贤友,比丘怎样才是具足六支呢?贤友,在这里,比丘用眼睛看到色之后,既不欢喜,也不忧恼,安住在舍心中,保持正念和正知。用耳朵听到声音……中略……用鼻子闻到气味,用舌头尝到味道,用身体接触到触,用意认识到法之后,既不欢喜,也不忧恼,安住在舍心中,保持正念和正知。贤友,比丘就是这样具足六支的。巴利
‘‘Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Sotena saddaṃ sutvā…pe… ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā, jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā, kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā, manasā dhammaṃ viññāya neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Evaṃ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348, 360).
“有一守护”的意思是:他拥有以念为守护的最上守护,所以叫“有一守护”。确实有这样的说法:巴利
Ekārakkhoti satiārakkhena eko uttamo ārakkho assāti ekārakkho. Vuttañhetaṃ –
贤友,比丘怎样才算拥有一种守护呢?贤友,在这里,比丘以念守护的心而安住。贤友,比丘就是这样拥有一种守护的。巴利
‘‘Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu satārakkhena cetasā samannāgato viharati. Evaṃ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu ekārakkho hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348, 360).
有四不依靠:以慧而对受用、回避、排遣、断除这四种不依靠,由于对这四种不依靠在此处与彼处都不动摇,所以称为有四不依靠;他已经达到并安住于这四种不依靠。此即所说:巴利
Caturāpassenoti paññāya paṭisevanaparivajjanavinodanapajahanānaṃ vasena catunnaṃ apassayānaṃ ito cito ca aparivattamānānaṃ vasena caturāpasseno, tesaṃ pāpuṇitvā ṭhito. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“贤友,比丘怎样才是具备四种依靠的人呢?贤友,在这里,比丘经过审慎考量后受用一类事物,经过审慎考量后避开一类事物,经过审慎考量后消除一类事物,经过审慎考量后舍断一类事物……”应当依照这样的方式详细展开。巴利
‘‘Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṃ parivajjeti. Saṅkhāyekaṃ vinodeti, saṅkhāyekaṃ pajahatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.348, 360) nayena vitthāretabbaṃ.
已排除各别谛者:因为像“只有这个见解是真理,只有这个才是真理”这样各别执取,所以那些各别称为见谛的已被排除、丢弃、断除,因此他就是已排除各别谛者。巴利
Paṇunnapaccekasaccoti ‘‘idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ, idameva sacca’’nti evaṃ pāṭiekkaṃ gahitattā paccekasaṅkhātāni diṭṭhisaccāni paṇunnāni nihaṭāni pahīnāni assāti paṇunnapaccekasacco.
“等具得遍求者”这个词里,“avayā”的意思是无减损,“saṭṭhā”的意思是散放。正确地、无减损地散放一切遍求,所以叫“samavayasaṭṭhesano”,意思就是正确地散放一切遍求。“Kevalī”是圆满者。“Vusitavā”是已住梵行者,也就是在依止共住中、在圣道中、在十种圣住中都已安住的人。“Uttamapuriso”(上人):因为烦恼已灭尽,所以是殊胜之人、良骏之人。“Paramapuriso”(最上人):就是上人;或者因为证得了最上的所得,也就是证得了应当证得的最上阿拉汉果,成为无上福田的最上人,因此称为最上人。因为他能进入无上等至,已证得不死之得,所以是达到最上所得者。另有一种解说:了知在家生活的过患,以进入教法而成为上人;了知有身的过患,以进入观而成为最上人;了知烦恼的过患,以进入圣域之内而成为达到最上所得者。巴利
Samavayasaṭṭhesanoti ettha avayāti anūnā. Saṭṭhāti vissaṭṭhā. Sammā avayā saṭṭhā esanā assāti samavayasaṭṭhesano. Sammā vissaṭṭhasabbaesanoti attho. Kevalīti paripuṇṇo. Vusitavāti vusitabrahmacariyo, garusaṃvāse ariyamaggepi dasasu ariyavāsesupi vusitavanto. Uttamapurisoti khīṇakilesattā visesapuriso ājaññapuriso. Paramapurisoti uttamapuriso, paramaṃ vā paṭilābhaṃ pattattā uttamaṃ pattabbaṃ arahattapaṭilābhaṃ patto anuttarapuññakkhettabhūto uttamapuriso, tenevatthena paramapuriso. Anuttaraṃ samāpattiṃ samāpajjituṃ amataṃ paṭilābhaṃ pattattā paramapattippatto. Atha vā ‘‘gharāvāse ādīnavaṃ sañjānitvā sāsanapavisanavasena uttamapuriso. Attabhāve ādīnavaṃ sañjānitvā vipassanāpavisanavasena paramapuriso. Kilese ādīnavaṃ sañjānitvā ariyabhūmantaraṃ paviṭṭho paramapattippattoti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
既不积集:因为已经断除了善与不善,所以不再增长它们的果报。也不消散:因为安住在果上,所以不再破坏。已消散而住:因为安住在寂止断除之中,所以已经摧毁烦恼而安住。从这里往后,三句都应当只配合道与果来解释。既不舍断:因为没有应当舍断的东西,所以不舍断烦恼。也不执取:因为没有可被爱、慢、见执取的对象,所以不以它们执取。已舍断而住:就是已经舍弃而安住。既不缝合:不以渴爱而缝合。也不高举:不以慢而高举。已散解而住:指不造作渴爱的缝合而安住——有人这样解释。也不吹灭:不熄灭烦恼之火。也不扇燃:不让烦恼之火燃烧起来。已吹灭而住:就是熄灭了那烦恼之火而安住。巴利
Nevācinatīti kusalākusalānaṃ pahīnattā tesaṃ vipākaṃ na vaḍḍheti. Nāpacinatīti phale ṭhitattā na viddhaṃseti. Apacinitvā ṭhitoti paṭippassaddhipahāne ṭhitattā kilese viddhaṃsetvā ṭhito. Ito paraṃ tīhipi padehi maggaphalavaseneva yojetabbaṃ. Neva pajahatīti pahātabbābhāvena kilese na pajahati. Na upādiyatīti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi gahetabbābhāvato tehi na gaṇhāti. Pajahitvā ṭhitoti cajitvā ṭhito. Neva saṃsibbatīti taṇhāvasena neva saṃsibbati. Na ussinetīti mānavasena na ukkaṃsati. Visinitvā ṭhitoti taṇhāsaṃsīvanaṃ akatvā ṭhitoti evameke vaṇṇayanti. Neva vidhūpetīti kilesaggiṃ na nibbāpeti. Na sandhūpetīti kilesaggiṃ na jālāpeti. Vidhūpetvā ṭhitoti taṃ nibbāpetvā ṭhito.
以无学戒蕴来说,因为具足了无需再学的无学语戒、业戒、命戒这一戒蕴,所以安住;也就是以不退失的状态而安住。以定蕴来说,是与精进和念相应的定。以解脱蕴来说,是与果位解脱相应的蕴。以解脱智见蕴来说,是省察智。以慈之遍净来说,是由远离随烦恼、安住于清净状态之慈而安住。对于悲等也是同样的道理。已证得谛,是指依自性在自己相续中成就、通达四谛而安住。已超越动摇,是指超越了那令人动摇的渴爱。烦恼火,是指贪等烦恼之火。已遍尽,是指已灭尽、已熄灭。由于不再流转,是指不再在轮回中流转,也就是不再回来巴利
Asekkhenasīlakkhandhenāti sikkhitabbābhāvena asekkhena vācākammantājīvasīlakkhandhena sīlarāsinā samannāgatattā ṭhito, aparihīnabhāvena ṭhito. Samādhikkhandhenāti vāyāmasatīhi sampayuttena samādhinā. Vimuttikkhandhenāti phalavimuttisampayuttakkhandhena. Vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhenāti paccavekkhaṇañāṇena. Saccaṃ sampaṭipādiyitvāti catuariyasaccaṃ sabhāvavasena sakasantāne sampādiyitvā paṭivijjhitvā ṭhito. Ejaṃ samatikkamitvāti kampanataṇhaṃ atikkamitvā. Kilesagginti rāgādikilesaggiṃ. Pariyādiyitvāti khepetvā nibbāpetvā. Aparigamanatāyāti saṃsāre agamanabhāvena punāgamanābhāvenāti attho. Kaṭaṃ samādāyāti jayaggāhaṃ gahetvā. Muttipaṭisevanatāyāti sabbakilesehi muccitvā rūpādiārammaṇasevanavasena. Atha vā sabbakilesehi muttaphalasamāpattisevanavasena. Mettāya pārisuddhiyāti upakkilesamuttāya parisuddhabhāve ṭhitāya mettāya ṭhito. Karuṇādīsupi eseva nayo.
彻底清净:因为已经超越了清净的状态,达到了清净的顶点,所以安住。无执取:渴爱、邪见、我慢被称为“执取”,它们的不存在就是“无执取”,也就是以远离渴爱、邪见、我慢的状态安住。正如所说的——巴利
Accantapārisuddhiyāti atikkantaparisuddhabhāvena parisuddhiyā antaṃ pāpuṇitvā ṭhito. Atammayatāyāti taṇhādiṭṭhimānā ‘‘tammayā’’ti vuccanti. Tesaṃ abhāvo atammayatā, tāya taṇhādiṭṭhimānavirahitatāya ṭhito. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“这样的人就是世间解、善慧者,在一切法中都没有‘这是我所有的’这种执取,因此被称为牟尼。”(《增支部》3.40)这里的意思也是:远离贪爱、慢和邪见。所谓“因为已解脱”,是说以从一切烦恼中解脱的状态。所谓“因为已满足”,是说依照所得、依照能力、依照适合的程度而感到满足,安住在满足的状态中。巴利
‘‘So tādiso lokavidū sumedho, sabbesu dhammesu atammayo munī’’ti (a. ni. 3.40). Etthāpi taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivirahitoti attho. Vimuttattāti sabbakilesehi muttabhāvena. Santussitattāti yathālābhayathābalayathāsāruppasantosavasena santuṭṭhabhāvena ṭhito.
在“蕴的尽头”这一说法里,是指把一蕴、四蕴、五蕴这三类蕴,用三种遍知之火彻底烧尽之后,安住在终点、最后阶段;或者说,这些蕴没有尽头,那就是它们的尽头,所以安住在那个尽头。界尽头等等也是同样的道理。不过有这些差别:界尽头是指十八界的尽头;处尽头是指十二处的尽头;趣尽头是指地狱等五趣的尽头;受生尽头是指在善趣、恶趣中的投生;结生尽头是指在欲有、色有、无色有中的结生;有尽头是指一蕴有、四蕴有、五蕴有,有想、无想、非想非非想,以及欲有、色有、无色有的尽头;轮回尽头是指蕴、界、处不间断流转的尽头;轮转尽头是指业轮、果报轮、烦恼轮的尽头。在最后有里,是指在最终投生的有中。安住在最后身聚里,是指安住在最终的身体里。持最后身,是指执持最终的身体,所以叫持最后身。阿拉汉,是因为远离,因为杀灭了烦恼之敌,因为值得资具等供养,因为行恶时没有隐秘,所以叫阿拉汉。巴利
Khandhapariyanteti ekacatupañcakkhandhānaṃ tīhi pariññaggīhi jhāpetvā ante avasāne ṭhito , natthi etassa antoti vā pariyantaṃ, tasmiṃ pariyante. Dhātupariyantādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – dhātupariyanteti aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ pariyante. Āyatanapariyanteti dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ. Gatipariyanteti nirayādipañcannaṃ gatīnaṃ. Upapattipariyanteti sugatiduggatīsu nibbattiyā. Paṭisandhipariyanteti kāmarūpārūpabhavesu paṭisandhiyā . Bhavapariyanteti ekavokāracatupañcasaññāasaññānevasaññānāsaññākāmarūpaarūpabhavānaṃ. Saṃsārapariyanteti khandhadhātuāyatanānaṃ abbocchinnapavattiyā. Vaṭṭapariyanteti kammavipākakilesavaṭṭānaṃ pariyante. Antime bhaveti avasāne upapattibhave. Antime samussaye ṭhitoti avasāne samussaye sarīre ṭhito. Antimadehadharoti antimaṃ avasānadehaṃ sarīraṃ dhāretīti antimadehadharo. Arahāti ārakattā arīnaṃ, arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā arahā.
对于那位漏尽者来说,这个身体、这个自体就是最后的一生,到此终结。“最后”是指极少、微弱的那一口食物,就像最后一口饭团。为了说明不会再结生,所以说“生、死、轮回,但对他已无再生”。生就是出生,死就是因那个而死去。诸蕴等无间断的轮回流转,对那位漏尽者也不再有了——在总结这首偈颂时,世尊如此说道:巴利
Tassāyaṃ pacchimakoti tassa khīṇāsavassa ayaṃ samussayo attabhāvo avasāno. Carimoti appo mando carimo ālopo, carimaṃ kabaḷaṃ viya. Puna paṭisandhiyā natthibhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘jātimaraṇasaṃsāro, natthi tassa punabbhavo’’ti āha. Jananaṃ jāti, maranti tenāti maraṇaṃ, khandhādīnaṃ abbocchinnā saṃsārapavatti ca tassa khīṇāsavassa puna natthīti vuttaṃ gāthaṃ nigamento āha tenāha bhagavā –
因此,众生……中略……乘船而至彼岸。巴利
‘‘Tasmā jantu…pe… nāvaṃ sitvāva pāragū’’ti.
在这部经里,凡是中间没有明确说出来的内容,都应该按照经文本身的读法来理解。巴利
Imasmiṃ sutte yaṃ antarantarā na vuttaṃ, taṃ pāṭhānusārena gahetabbaṃ.